EFTA01226814

SOFTWARE HOUSE From Tyco Security Products C•CURE 9000 Version 2.50 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226814 C•CURE and Software House are registered trademarks of Tyco Security Products. The trademarks, logos, and service marks displayed on this document are registered in the United States [or other countries]. Any misuse of the trademarks is strictly prohibited and Tyco Security Products will aggressively enforce its intellectual property rights to the fullest extent of the law, including pursuit of criminal prosecution wherever necessary. MI trademarks not owned by Tyco Security Products are the property of their respective owners, and are used with permission or allowed under applicable laws. Product offerings and specifications are subject to change without notice. Actual products may vary from photos. Not all products include all features. Availability varies by region; contact your regional sales manager. Software version: 250 Document Number: UM-135 Revision Number: RO Release Date: December 2015 This manual is proprietary information of Software House. Unauthorized reproduction of any portion of this manual is prohibited. The material in this manual is for information purposes only. It is subject to change without notice. Software House assumes no responsibility for incorrect information this manual may contain. O 2015 Tyco Security Products. MI rights reserved. EFTA01226815 Table of Contents Preface 9 How to Use this Manual 10 Finding More Information 11 Conventions 12 Software House Customer Support Center 13 Chapter 1 - Personnel Overview 15 Personnel Pane Overview 16 Card Formats 17 Personnel Object Tasks 18 Creating an Object 18 Creating an Object Template 18 Creating an Object from a Template 19 Editing an Object 20 Viewing a List of an Object Type 20 Sorting and Filtering the list of Objects 21 Using the Object List Context Menu 23 Exporting an Object 24 Deleting an Object 25 Disabling Credentials for Inactivity Overview 26 Disabling Credentials for Inactivity in an Enterprise Environment 27 Chapter 2 - Personnel 29 Searching for Personnel 30 Searching for Credentials for Personnel 36 Personnel Editor 37 Personnel Editor Tabs 37 Personnel Tasks 37 Accessing the Personnel Editor 38 Selecting a Personnel View 39 Using the Personnel List Context Menu 39 Exporting Personnel Portraits 42 Configuring the Disable by Inactivity Process for Personnel Credentials 44 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle 3 EFTA01226816 Personnel General Tab 46 General Tab Tasks 46 Personnel General Tab Definitions 46 Setting the Personnel Type 49 Choosing an Operator Name 50 Setting Options 51 Setting an Email Address 52 Setting the Escort Option 52 Setting a General PIN 53 Personnel Credentials Tab 54 Personnel Credential Tab Tasks 54 Presonnel Credential Tab Definitions 54 Personnel Credentials Tab Definitions 55 Credentials Tab Tasks 59 Adding an Access Card 61 Adding a PIN-Only Access Credential 62 Removing an Access Card 62 Validating a CHUID 63 Personnel Clearances Tab 64 Personnel Clearances Tab Definitions 64 Clearances Tab Tasks 65 Personnel Customer Tab 67 Personnel Customer Tab Definitions 68 Personnel Customer Extended Tab 69 Personnel Customer Extended Tab Definitions 69 Personnel Images Tab 71 Personnel Images Tab Definitions 71 Images Tab Tasks 72 Personnel Badging Tab 77 Personnel Badging Tab Definitions 77 Badging Tab Tasks 78 Enrolling/Programming a Smart Card 80 Personnel Previous Doors Tab 81 Personnel Previous Doors Definitions 81 Previous Doors Tab Tasks 82 Personnel User-defined Fields Tab 83 Personnel Custom Clearance Tab 84 Custom Clearances in an Enterprise Environment 84 Personnel Custom Clearance Tab Definitions 85 Custom Clearance Tab Tasks 87 Personnel Documents Tab 91 Personnel Documents Tab Definitions 92 Documents Tab Tasks 93 4 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration GukM EFTA01226817 Personnel Personnel Triggers Tab 96 Personnel Triggers Tab Definitions 96 Personnel Personnel Triggers Tab Tasks 97 Chapter 3 - Personnel Type 99 Personnel Type Overview 100 Personnel Type Definitions 102 Using the Personnel Type Context Menu 103 Samples of Expiration Time Span Settings 104 Chapter 4 - Clearance 109 Clearance Editor 110 Clearance Tasks 110 Clearance General Tab 114 Clearance Doors Tab 115 Clearance Elevators Tab 116 Clearance Groups Tab 118 Chapter 5 - Credential 121 Credential Overview 122 Credential Dynamic View 124 Using the Credential View Context Menu 125 Searching for Credentials 128 Performing a Credential Quick Search 129 Quick Search Examples for Temporary Credentials 130 Credential Editor 132 Credential Editor Tabs 132 Credential Tasks 132 Accessing The Credential Editor 133 Credential General Tab 134 Credential General Tab Definitions 134 Credential User-defined Fields Tab 138 Credential Badging Tab 139 Temporary Credential Tasks 140 Managing Temporary Credentials 140 Creating a Temporary Credential 141 Assigning a Temporary Credential 142 Activating a Temporary Credential 143 Using Temporary Credentials for Anonymous Visits 144 Emailing Reminders to Return Temporary Credential 145 Returning a Temporary Credential 146 Marking a Temporary Credential as Lost or Stolen 147 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide 5 EFTA01226818 System Variables for Credentials 148 Credentials Event Actions 149 Chapter 6 - Custom Clearance 151 Custom Clearance View 152 Custom Clearance Tasks 152 Using the Custom Clearance View Context Menu 152 Removing an Expired Custom Clearance from a Personnel Record 153 Chapter 7 - Images 155 Images Editor 156 Images Tasks 156 Images Definitions 159 Chapter 8 - Badge Layout 161 Badge Layout Editor 162 Badge Layout Tasks 162 Badge Layout Definitions 165 Chapter 9 - CHUID Format 167 CHUID Format Overview 168 CHUID Format Editor 171 CHUID Format Tasks 171 Applying a CHUID Format to Existing Credentials 174 Viewing a List of CHUID Formats 177 CHUID Definitions 177 Chapter 10 - Personnel Views 181 Personnel Views Editor 182 Default Personnel Views 182 Understanding Personnel Views and the Customer Field Editor 183 Personnel Views Editor Tabs 183 Personnel Views Editor Tasks 184 Accessing the Personnel Views Editor 185 Creating a Copy of a Personnel View 185 Using the Personnel Views List Context Menu 186 Assigning Personnel Views to Operators 186 Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab 189 layout Designer Tab Tasks 189 Displaying the layout Designer in a Floating Window 190 Selecting a language 191 Restoring Deleted Objects 192 Restoring Labels 192 6 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226819 Restoring a Layout 193 Selecting Objects in the Layout 193 Adding a Field to a Tab 194 Moving a Field or Label 194 Moving a Field to the Front or Back 195 Moving a Field to Mother Tab 195 Moving a Field to a Different Group Box 1% Resizing a Field 1% Removing a Field 197 Aligning Fields 197 Changing a Field label 198 Changing Field Properties 198 Adding a Tab to a View 199 Removing a Tab .200 Setting the Tabbing Order for a Personnel View 200 Adding a Group Box 201 Deleting a Group Box 201 Personnel Views layout Designer Tab Definitions 202 Personnel Views Labels Tab 204 Labels Tab Tasks 204 Personnel Views labels Tab Definitions 206 Personnel Views Options Tab 208 Personnel Views Options Tab Definitions .208 Personnel Views Properties Panel 210 Personnel Views Properties Tab 214 Personnel Views Properties Tab Definitions 214 Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab 219 Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab Definitions 220 Adding User-defined Fields to a Personnel View 220 Index 223 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide 7 EFTA01226820 8 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226821 Preface The C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide is for new and experienced security system users who want to learn to use this product for the C•CURE 9000 Security Management System. In this preface How to Use this Manual 10 Finding More Information 11 Conventions 12 Software House Customer Support Center 13 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle Preface 9 EFTA01226822 How to Use this Manual How to Use this Manual This manual contains chapters that provide the following information about C•CURE 9000 Personnel configuration. Chapter 1: Personnel Overview Provides introductory information about Personnel in C•CURE 9000. Chapter 2: Personnel Provides instructions for configuring C•CURE 9000 Personnel records. Chapter 3: Personnel Type Explains how to create and modify Personnel Types. Chapter 4: Clearance Describes how to create and modify Clearances. Chapter 5: Credential Explains how to view, assign, and remove Personnel Credentials. Chapter 6: Custom Clearance Explains how to view Custom Clearances as well as how to remove expired Custom Clearances. Chapter 7: Images Provides information about importing and using Image objects in C•CURE 9000. Chapter 8: Badge Layout Provides information about creating and adding Badge Layouts to Personnel. Chapter 9: CHUID Format Describes how to create and use CI-IUID Formats. Chapter 10: Personnel Views Explains how to create and use Personnel Views. 10 Preface C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226823 Finding More Information Finding More Information You can access C•CURE 900(1 manuals and online Help for more information about C•CURE 9000. Manuals C•CURE 9000 software manuals are available in Adobe PDF format on the C•CURE 9000 DVD. You can access the manuals if you copy the appropriate PDF files from the C•CURE 9000 Installation DVD English \ Manuals folder. The available C•CURE 9000 and Software House manuals are listed in the C•CURE 9000 Installation and Upgrade Guide, and appear as hyperlinks in the online.pdf file on the C•CURE 9000 DVD English \ Manuals folder. These manuals are also available from the Software House Member Center website Online Help You can access C•CURE 9000 Help by pressing Fl or clicking Help from the menu bar in the Administration/Monitoring Station applications. These manuals are also available from the Software House Member Center website C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Preface 11 EFTA01226824 Conventions Conventions Ibis manual uses the following text formats and symbols. Convention Meaning Bold T his font indicates screen elements, and also indicates when you should take a direct action in a procedure. Bold font describes one of the following items: • A oommand or character to type, or • A button or option on the screen to press, or • A key on the keyboard to press • A screen element or name blue color text Indicates a hyperlink to a URL, or across-reference to a figure. table. or section in (htsg u•de. Regular Rafe font Indicates a new term. <text> Indicates a variable. The following items are used to indicate important information. NOTE TIP S Indicates a note. Notes call attention to any item of information that may be of special importance. Indicates an alternate method of performing a task. Indicates a caution. A caution contains information essential to avoid damage to the system. A caution can pertain to hardware or software. Indicates a warning. A warning contains information that advises users that failure to avoid a specific action could result in physical harm to the user or to the hardware. Indicates a danger. A danger contains information that users must know to avoid death or serious injury. 12 Preface C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226825 Software House Customer Support Center Software House Customer Support Center Telephone Technical Support During the period of the Agreement, the following guidelines apply: • Software House accepts service calls only from employees of the Systems Integrator of Record for the installation associated with the support inquiry. Before Calling Ensure that you: • Are the Dealer of record for this account. • Are certified by Software House for this product. • Have a valid license and current Software Support Agreement (SSA) for the system. • Have your system serial number available. • Have your certification number available. Hours Normal Support Hours Monday through F riday. 8:00 to 8:00 , EST. Except holidays. Emergency Support Hours 24 hours/day, seven days a week, 365 daystyear. Requires Enhanced SSA"7 x2r Standby Telephone Support (emergency) provided to Certified Technicians. For &lather customers. billable on time and materials basis. Minimum charges appty- See MSRP. Phone For telephone support contact numbers for all reg ions. see C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Preface 13 EFTA01226826 Software House Customer Support Center 14 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226827 Personnel Overview This chapter introduces the Personnel configuration components of the C•CURE 9000 Security and Event Management System. C•CURE 9000 Personnel provides the tools needed to configure Personnel records, user credentials, security clearances, badge layouts, images, and access card formats for your personnel. In this chapter Personnel Pane Overview 16 Personnel Object Tasks 18 Disabling Credentials for Inactivity Overview 26 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter! 15 EFTA01226828 Personnel Pane Over \new Personnel Pane Overview C•CURE 9000 Personnel gives you the ability to create Personnel records and define access credentials for your employees. You can access Personnel by clicking the Personnel button. The Personnel pane opens and you can access existing Personnel records or create new ones. The Personnel pane is shown in Figure 1 on Page 16. Figure 1: The Personnel Pane Personnel Badge Layout Badge Layout CHUID Format Clearance Credential Custom Clearance Guard Tour Guard Tour Scheduling Images Personnel Personnel Type Personnel Views Visit The Personnel pane allows you to access and define the following types of personnel related data from the drop￾down list in the Personnel pane toolbar. Table 1: Personnel Pane Selections Selection Meaning Badge Layout You can define the appearance and features of the access badges for your site using the C•CURE ID Badge Designer. See Badge Layout Editor on Page 162 for more information on the Badge Layout Editor. CHUID For mat You can specify the Card Holder Unique ID (CHUID) used to uniquely identify each person's access credentials. See CHUID Format Overview on Page 168 for more information on the CHUID Format Editor. Clearance You can define the locations that each cardholder can access, and assign time schedules for that access. See Clearance Editor on Page 110 for more information on the Clearance Editor. Credential You can view east of each individual access credential. See Credential Editor on Page 132 for more information on Credentials. Custom Clearance You can view a fist of each individual Custom Clearance.8 See Custom Clearance View on Page 152 for more information on Custom Clearances. Guard Tour You can use the Guard Tour Editor to defne Guard Tours, a series of Stops where a Guard checks in during security rounds, for your site. See the C•CURE 9000 Guard Tours Guide for detaied information about Guard Tours. If your license does not Include the Guard Tour option, this selection does not appear in the Personnel pane drop-down list. Guard Tour Scheduling. You can use the Guard Tour Scheduling Editor to configure schedules by which individual Guards are expected to run their assigned Guard Tours. See the C• CURE 9000 Guard Tours Guide for detaded information about Guard Tours. If your license does not indude the Guard Tour option, this selection does not appear in the Personnel pane drop-down list. 16 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226829 Personnel Pane Overview Personnel Pane Selections (continued) Selection Meaning Images You can import images from picture files saved on your system or network into the C•CURE 9000 database to use for portraits, signature. badge logos. and backgrounds. You can also view a list of all images stored in the database. See Images Editor on Page 156 for more information on Images. Personnel You can use the Personnel Editor Views to create individual records for each of the people who can access your site, including their access credentials and their clearances (the doors and locations they are allowed to access). See Personnel Editor on Page 37 for more information about the Personnel Editor. Personnel Type You can use the Personnel Type Editor to define terms that identify the type of personnel at your site. Employee and Contractor are provided, but you can define additional personnel types, such as guard, visitor, escort, or whatever terms are appropriate for you. These Personnel Types are mainly for customer use to accurately describe Personnel. However, you can also use the Personnel Type Editor to configure an inactivity period for each defined Personnel Type.This allows the system to disable any Credentials belonging to Personnel with the specified types after a period with no system activity. See Personnel Type Overview on Page 100 for more information on Personnel Types, and for more information about 'Disabling for Inactivity. Personnel Views PersonnelViewslet you customize the editing of Personnel records in C•CURE 9000. You can use the two default Personnel Views provided with C•CURE 9000, or you can create Personnel Views to display more or fewer fields, and add or remove tabs from a view, and assign those views to Operator Privileges so that your Operators editing and viewing Personnelonty have access to the fields that they need. See Personnel Views Editor on Page 182 for more information on Personnel Views. Visits Visits lets you create Visitor Management objects if your license includes the Visitor Management option. For more information about Visitor Management, see the C•CURE 9000 Visitor Management Guide. If your license does not include the Visitor Management option. this selection does not appear in the Personnel pane drop-down list. Card Formats You can define and customize the arrangement of data used by your Personnel access badges and your card readers. The Card Format Editor is accessed from the Card Formats and Keys pane in the C•CUKE 9000 Administration Client. See the &CURE 9000 Card Formats and Keys Guide for more information on the Card Format Editor. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 1 17 EFTA01226830 Personnel Object Tasks Personnel Object Tasks Many of the tasks you can perform on Personnel objects use the same general procedures. The methods for creating, editing, viewing a list of objects, exporting, and other functions are similar across most Personnel objects. • Creating an Object on Page 18 • Creating an Object Template on Page 18 • Creating an Object from a Template on Page 19 • Editing an Object on Page 20 • Viewing a List of an Object Type on Page 20 • Using the Object List Context Menu on Page 23 • Exporting an Object on Page 24 • Deleting an Object on Page 25 Creating an Object You can create an object from the Personnel pane using the Personnel pane drop-down list and the new button for the object type. S To Create an Object from the Personnel Pane 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select the object type you want to create (for example, Personnel) from the drop-down list in the Personnel Pane. 3. Click New to create a new object of the type you selected. The object type's editor opens, and you can configure the object. 4. To save your new object, click Save and Close. - or - Alternatively, if you want to save the object and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current object is saved and closed, but the object editor remains open to allow you to create a new object. NOTE On the Personnel Editor, you can click Save if you want to save the Personnel record and continue editing it without closing the editor. Creating an Object Template You can create a object template for most object types. You can use the template as the basis of new object records by saving the settings you want your objects to have in common. In a template, you can fill in field values with the same values for all records, and then use the template when you are creating new records. (This is subject to the settings that C•CURE 9000 allows you to save in a template for that object type.) The Templates you create are listed alphabetically in the drop-down list of the New button in the Personnel pane, as in the example below for Clearances. 18 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226831 Personnel °Disci Tasks Template Clearance ----Templates ADA Door Template Elevator Clearance Template Fire Door Clearance Template Secure Door Template Example: You could create a template for all personnel with a Personnel Type of Employee, with the same set of Clearances. Whenever you are creating a new Employee Personnel record, you can save time by creating the new record from the template instead of the default blank form. To Create a Object Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select the object type you want to create (for example, Personnel) from the drop-down list in the Personnel Pane. 3. Click the down-arrow on the New button and click on Template to create a new object template. The Object's editor opens, and you can configure the object. 4. Any fields that you configure values for become part of the template (subject to the settings that C•CURE 9000 allows you to save in a template for that object type). When you subsequently create a new object of this type from that template, these field values are already filled in. 5. To save your new object template, click Save and Close. NOTE On the Personnel Editor, you can click Save if you want to save the Personnel template and continue editing it without closing the editor. Creating an Object from a Template You can create a new object from a Template that you have previously saved. The new object created from the template contains the same settings, fields, and tabs as the template. To Create an Object from a Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select the object type you want to create (for example, Personnel Views) from the drop-down list in the Personnel Pane. 3. Click the down-arrow on New and select a template from the templates listed under —Templates. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 1 19 EFTA01226832 Personnel Object Tasks New Personnel Views Template --Tempkties operator-personnel-view-template 4. The object's Editor opens, and you can configure the object. 5. Type a name for the object in the Name field (the Name must be unique). 6. To save your new object, click Save and Close. Editing an Object Most objects in the Personnel pane have an editor that is used to configure the objects of that type. Credential is the exception - Credentials (which are contained in a Personnel record) are created using the Personnel editor. To Edit an Object 1. Display a Dynamic View list of the object you wish to edit (see Viewing a List of an Object Type on Page 20). 2. Click the object you wish to modify to select it. 3. Right-click the selected object and choose Edit from the context menu. 4. The object's Editor opens and you can change any of the settings for the object. 5. To save your modified object, click Save and Close. NOTE On the Personnel Editor, you can click Save if you want to save the Personnel record and continue editing it without closing the editor. Viewing a List of an Object Type You can view a list of all objects of a specific type by opening the default Dynamic View for the object type. To View a List of an Object Type 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select the object type you wish to view in a list (for example, select Personnel from the Personnel pane drop￾down list). 3. Click Elisk to open a Dynamic View listing all the objects of this type. (You can also click the down-arrow of this button to either view the list in the current tabbed view or open a new tabbed view). 4. You can sort, filter, and group items in the list using the Dynamic View icons. See Sorting and Filtering the List of Objects on Page 21. 5. You can right-click an object in the list to open the context menu (see Deleting an Object on Page 25) and perform any of the functions on that menu. 20 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle EFTA01226833 Personnel Object Tasks 6. You can right-click on a column heading (such as Name) in the view to display a context menu that lets you change the columns displayed by the Dynamic View. El Department Name Disabled Intl Name Object ID Personnel Type Mae colurms... • Click on the name of a column to add it to the view. • Click on a column that is currently displayed in the view (marked with CD, to remove that column from the view. • Click on More Columns to choose additional columns to display, if there are additional columns that are not displayed. Select one or more columns from the dialog box that appears, using CTRL+Left-click, or a range of columns using SHIFf+Left-click, then click OK to display the additional columns. Dug column, rco Group ty1 here Ptcotee I Deeopicet Cek temtoll:et eke. le. 21 AttinceeShunt PIA Select Ites box i ites potion a WON* viii Meow* Antpattbect Event `ahem" en artigembeck ideal Mines neer& Anlombeck Este Wyew the masons sett toe teththanteek Nadi Mn Lee lab 0CW:0d b the it. Atom:wee:1 tete Tete dim veil eft to nee Cleaaae Fite The went *matte eta level d Its person peel Cutexito Feld Deist 0**2 CAMS Mt Da2 0 **3 Cuseme Feld Dis3 Ogee Cesmw Feld Neel -eten-ett c.o.-tee...tee r .........- .v...i.. in-••••A Wawa pa Columns that you add or remove from a Dynamic View in this manner are only in effect until you close the Dynamic View. If you want additional columns to appear each time you open the view, you must edit and save changes to that specific dynamic view. NOTE If you add new records to the database while you have a Dynamic View open, or delete existing records, the Dynamic view automatically updates to add or remove these records. You can also click to refresh the list manually. Sorting and Filtering the List of Objects Once you have displayed the list of Objects Dynamic View, you can sort and filter this list using the Dynamic View toolbar. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter! 21 EFTA01226834 Pc Yr, I Iris Filtering the List of Objects You can filter the list of Objects to display only the Objects that match the criteria you specify. You can filter the list by any field that is displayed on the Dynamic View. To Filter the List of Objects 1. From the Objects Dynamic View, click on the Dynamic View toolbar to enable filtering. A filter row appears in the Dynamic view. 2. Click in any column in the filter row to filter the data in the list. You can type in a value, or choose a value from the drop-down list (click the that appears when you click in the column). 3. Click the filter button El to chose a filter criteria (such as "Begins with" or "Contains") from a drop-down list. The filter button changes to reflect the choice you made. 4. You can turn off all filtering criteria by clicking ID to the left of all columns, or you can click the same icon in a column you have selected to clear data in that column only. Sorting the List of Objects You can sort the list by any field that is displayed on the Dynamic View. To Sort the List of Objects 1. From the Objects Dynamic View, click a column heading (such as "Name") to sort the list of Objects by the data in that column. 2. You can toggle the sort from ascending to descending and back by continuing to click on the column head. 3. You can display additional columns by right-clicking a column heading and clicking on a column in the list of columns. Columns shown in the list with a check mark are already selected for display. Printing a List of Objects You can print the Objects Dynamic View as a report listing all or some of the Objectson your system. You can filter and sort the list before sending it print. To Print the List of Objects 1. From the Objects View, sort and filter the list so the records you want to print are displayed in the desired order. You can also change the width of the data columns by clicking the column margin and dragging to make it wider or narrower. 2. Click to open a Wmdows Print dialog box. You can set the paper size, source, orientation, and margins from this box. You can also click the Printer button to select a different printer. 3. Click OK and a Print Preview dialog box appears. You can use the toolbar to zoom the preview, change the arrangement of displayed pages, navigate to any page of the list, and send the list to print. 4. Click the Print button th to send the Objects list to print. 22 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226835 Personnel Object Tasks Using the Object List Context Menu l'he context menu that opens when you right-click on one or more objects in the Dynamic View includes some standard selections and often contains additional selections that are specific to the object type. (See Figure 2 on Page 23 for an example, showing the Personnel context menu). You can select one or more object in the Dynamic View (using multiple selection combinations such as SHIFT+Left￾click and CTRL+Left-click) and perform functions such as Set property, Add to group, Export selection, and Find in Journal using the context menu. See Table 2 on Page 23 for definitions of the standard context menu selections. Figure 2: Personnel Us( Context Menu Edt X Ddete gg Set ProPertY t Add to stew aa Expat selection... Fart selected Portraits... Rnd n Audit Log... FS in lama,- 41 Batch Pnnt Badges RI Change Pants Grace Personnel ia Assign Clearances Lai Remove Clearances Remove Person From Area Anbpassback Reset Card Area Lockout Grace Grace Carpool Group Assign Temporary Oedertid Show Associations Mentor Create From Temp/ate Table 2: Object List Context Menu Selection Description Edit Click this menu selection to edit the object. The object's editor opens. You can rename the record, change its Description, and the objects and fields to indude in it. Delete Dick this menu selection to delete the selected object. A prompt appears asking you to confirm that you want to delete the object. Dick Yes to delete the object or No to cancel the deletion. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 1 23 EFTA01226836 Personnel Object Tasks Object List Context Menu (continued) Selection Description Set Property Click this menu selection to change the Property value of a field in all the selected objects. For example. you could select multiple Personnel and change their Personnel Type to "Employee". Adiabg box appears asking you to select a property to change. Click ••• to open a selection list and click the property you wish to change. You can then change the value of this property by changing the Value field. Add to Group You can add one or more selected objects to a Group of that object type. When you click this menu choice, a dialog box appears for you to select the Group to which to add the object. When you dick a Group of the Object type in the list, the selected object is added to the Group. Export Selection Click this menu selection to Open an Export...to XML or CSV file dialog box to export one or more of the selected objects to either an XML or a CSV file. This allows you to quickty and easily create XML/CSV reportson the selected data. See Exporting an Object on Page 24 for more information. Find in Audit Log Opens a Query Parameters dialog box in which you can enter prompts and/or modify the query aiteria to search for entries in the Audit Log that reference the selected object. When found, the resutts display in a separate Dynamic View (see the C• CURE 9000 Data Views Guide). Find in Journal Opens a Query Parameters dialog box in which you can enter prompts and/or modify the queryaiteria to search for entries in the Journal that reference the selected object. When found the resutts display in a separate Dynamic View (see the C• CURE 9000 Data Views Guide). Change Partition This selection is available if your system is partitioned. Click to open a dialog box that a lbws you to change the Partition to which the object belongs. For more information see the chapter on Partitions in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. Show Association This menu selection is available only for the following object types on the Personnel Pane: Badge Layouts, CHUID Formats, Clearances, Personnel. and Personnel Types. Click to open a dialog box that lists Security Objects associated with the object in the Dynamic View. For more information, see •Showing Associations for an Object• in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. Monitor This menu selection is available only for the Personnel object type on the Personnel Pane. Click this menu selection to view Door swipe activity on an Admin Monitor Activity Viewer for the selected Personnel. For more information. see •Monitoring an Object from the Administration Station• in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. Create from Template Click to create a new Personnel record from a Personnel Template. This menu selection is available onty when you right-Gaon a Personnel Template. This is useful if you have a Large number of Personnel Templates- you can use the Search fields (Name. Personnel Type. etc.) to narrow the list of Personnel records displayed in the Dynamic View so that you can more easity choose the Personnel Template from which to create a new Personnel record. Exporting an Object From a Dynamic View of an object, you can export an object as an .XML file or a .CSV file. NOTE Although XML is the initial default file type, once you choose a type in the Save as type field, whether XML or CSV, that becomes the default the next time this dialog box opens. ■ When you export to an XML file, all available data for the selected object(s), whether displayed in the Dynamic View or not—as well as all the child objects of the selected record(s), is exported. ■ When you export to a CSV file, you can view the exported data in an Excel spreadsheet and further manipulate it for your use. Only data in the columns displaying in the Dynamic View is exported, and in the order displayed. This allows you to both select and arrange data fields for your report. 24 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226837 Personnel Object Tasks NOTE CSV-formatted exports cannot be imported into C•CURE 9000. If you require importing functionality (such as importing a object into a different C•CURE 9000 server, export to XML. When you click Export Selection, you are running the export on the client computer. Consequently, the system does not use the Default Export Directory Path—which is on the server. It opens a directory on the client, reverting to the last directory used. You can navigate to the default export server directory, if you wish. Or to avoid confusion or use the same destination folder for both client and server computers, you can use UNC (Universal Naming Convention) paths. Example: \ \ ComputerName \ Program Files \ Software House \ SYVHSystem \ Export For more information, see the Dynamic Views chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide. To Export an Object to an XML or CSV File 1. Open a Dynamic View of the object type (see Viewing a List of an Object Type on Page 20). 2. Select one or more objects from the list, then right-click. 3. Select Export Selection from the context menu. A Windows file selection dialog opens to allow you to export the object(s). 4. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the exported objects. 5. Choose the type of export from the drop-down list in the Save as type field (either Export as XML file or Export as CSV file). 6. Type a file name in the File name field, or click on a file in the folder (that file will be overwritten by the export) and click Save to export the object. Deleting an Object You cart delete an object from C•CURE 9000 if it is no longer needed. To Delete an Object 1. Display a Dynamic View list of the object (see Viewing a List of an Object Type on Page 20). 2. Select the object you wish to delete. 3. Right-click the selected object and choose Delete from the context menu. 4. A dialog box appears to confirm that you want to delete the object. Click No to cancel the deletion, or click Yes to delete the object. A dialog box appears to show the progress of the deletion. 5. Click OK to complete the deletion. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter! 25 EFTA01226838 Disabling Credentials for InactivityOverview Disabling Credentials for Inactivity Overview The Disabling by Inactivity capability allows you to configure your C•CURE 9000 system to automatically disable Personnel Credentials that have not been used for a specified period of time. NOTE Only Card Admits are considered 'card activity' by the Disabling for Inactivity service. Card Rejects do not count. In addition, the system provides reports that can tell you the following: ■ Which Credentials will be expired on a certain date. ■ Which Credentials were expired on a certain date. ■ Which Credentials should have been expired, but were not. For information on how the Disabling by Inactivity process works with MAS and SAS servers, see Disabling Credentials for Inactivity in an Enterprise Environment on Page 27. To Set Up Disabling by Inactivity for Your System 1. Configure two System Variables in the Personnel category, Disable by Inactivity Enabled and Disable by Inactivity Scan Time. For information about editing these System Variables, see: ■ Configuring the Disable by Inactivity Process for Personnel Credentials on Page 44 ■ the Personnel Category in the C• CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide 2. Configure Inactivity Periods for the Personnel Types you have defined for your site. For information, see Personnel Type Overview on Page 100 and Configuring the Disable by Inactivity PitiLess for Personnel Credentials on Page 44. 3. Assign the desired Personnel Types to Personnel Records. For information, see Setting the Personnel Type on Page 49. You can review the status of Credentials—related to Inactivity Disabling—in several different ways: ■ For an individual Personnel Record - on the Personnel Editor Credential tab. For information, see Personnel Credentials Tab on Page 54. NOTE A credential whose status is: ■ Lost, Stolen, Disabled, or Expired is excluded from being disabled by the inactivity process. ■ Disabled by Inactivity will also have the Disabled status set. ■ For a list of Credentials in the system - on the Credential Dynamic View. For information, see Credential Editor on Page 132 ■ For a list of Credentials in the system - By running any one of three pre-defined Reports: • SVVH62 - Credentials that Should be Disabled by Inactivity Report • SVVH63 - Credentials that have been Disabled by Inactivity Report • SWH64 - Credentials that should be Disabled by Inactivity but Were Not Report For information, see Appendix A in the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide . 26 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226839 Disabling Credentials for InactivityOverview Disabling Credentials for Inactivity in an Enterprise Environment In an Enterprise Environment, the two Personnel category System Variables, Disable by Inactivity Enabled and Disable by Inactivity Scan Time must be configured appropriately on each individual server since Credentials are expired on their own server. A Global Personnel's Credentials are expired by the MAS server using information propagated from each SAS server. Software House assumes that the MAS and all its SASes are synchronizing normally on a regular basis. Delays in synchronization can cause inaccurate expirations, as well as inaccurate data on any of the Inactivity Reports. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter! 27 EFTA01226840 Disabling Credentials for InactivityOverview 28 Chapter 1 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Con figuration Guide EFTA01226841 2 Personnel The C•CURE 9000 Personnel Editor is used to create Personnel records for the people who need access to your site. In this chapter Searching for Personnel 30 Searching for Credentials for Personnel 36 Personnel Editor 37 Configuring the Disable by Inactivity Process for Personnel Credentials 44 Personnel General Tab 46 Personnel Credentials Tab 54 Personnel Clearances Tab 64 Personnel Customer Tab 67 Personnel Customer Extended Tab 69 Personnel Images Tab 71 Personnel Badging Tab 77 Personnel Previous Doors Tab 81 Personnel User-defined Fields Tab 83 Personnel Custom Clearance Tab 84 Personnel Documents Tab 91 Personnel Personnel Triggers Tab 96 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle Chapter 2 29 EFTA01226842 Searching for Personnel Searching for Personnel You can search for Personnel using the Search functions on the Personnel pane. You can perform a Quick Search using the Personnel Name fields, or you can perform an Advanced search by defining a Query using the Query Editor. Searches are activated by clicking the Search button (igik). ■ To show a list of all Personnel, click Pa without entering any data in the Quick or Advanced Search panes. ■ To Quick Search for Personnel, type your search information in the Quick Search pane and click Q. See Performing a Personnel Quick Search on Page 30 for more information. ■ To perform an Instant Query, click Advanced to show the Advanced pane, then click Instant Query. See Running an Instant Query on Page 31 for more information. ■ To perform an Advanced search, click Advanced to show the Advanced pane, then select a Personnel Query from the list and click at., as shown in Figure 3 on Page 30. See Defining a Personnel Advanced Search (Query) on Page 33 for more information. NOTE The list includes the pre-defined Queries Sated to Personnel that come with the system. (See Appendix A in the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information.) The list also includes any Queries already defined by an Operator. Figure 3: Advanced Search Pane lam Pescanal C Small Advanced ossonnehorny SO/021 • Cad Huta Search Chary $WH24 • Pasornel By Name ad Native Cluny SWH3 • Naar* by Lad Name Okay SOM26. PaternalDeane Egied a E oxe: SVM27. Pasemel Teague" SWKIII. Pattern( Recenth Placa Badges ( SVM,.11 • Pasant( Lacking speeded Cleatarne 0 SV4432 • PaittmelINC614301C4tgeohe wee pas SVA433 • Paternal nal in a pap Quay SWHII • PeascrneRdho do HOT have a lost Mole SWHsap0ST6 • Cacholdeit adiriled a rejected al • SWalaad 02 Pettornel Delved at Goads 4 • I • I% IP I • IP I • ; ■ To search for Credentials for Personnel based on certain conditions, see Searching for Credentials for Personnel on Page 36. ■ If you have defined a default Dynamic View for Personnel that includes a Query, click Oda to display that view, showing Personnel that meet the criteria in the Query. See the Chapter on Dynamic Views in the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information about default views. Performing a Personnel Quick Search To Perform a Personnel Quick Search 1. Click the Personnel pane button. 30 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226843 Scanting for Personnel 2. The Personnel pane opens with Quick Search visible. Personnel Pommel - Duck Peconrel hoe Fon Name Lao Harm) In6dellame Name F Checked In r Temple.. Advanced 3. Click the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar and select Personnel. 4. If you wish to search for a specific Personnel Type, select from the Personnel Type drop-down. 5. Type the personnel name information you wish to search for in the Quick Search fields (FustName, LastName, MiddleName, or Name). You can type a full name or a partial name (search for a name that "starts with" the letters you type). Example: If you type "Smi" in Name you would find "Smith". The Name field can be used to find combinations of last, first, and middle names. 6. If you wish to search for a Checked In Visitor, select the Checked In field (click until a check mark appears). 7. If you wish to search for a personnel template file rather than a person record, select the Template field (click until a check mark appears). NOTE The check mark field has three states: r - Blank means "search for records where this criteria is NOT True. - Checked means "search for records where this criteria IS True". F - Dimmed means "do not use this criteria in the search". 8. Click JD - to open a Dynamic View showing the Personnel objects that match the information you entered. Running an Instant Query An Instant Query is useful when you need to find information in C•CURE 9000, but you do not want to create a new Query and save it. Instant Query is useful for a one-time look up of objects that are not available with a Quick Search. For example, the Quick Search for Personnel lets you look for Name-related data. It does not let you search for Card Numbers, Personnel Type, Credentials, and most other Personnel data. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 31 EFTA01226844 Searching for Personnel An Instant Query lets you look for any Personnel-related data by defining your search terms on the fly and running it. An Instant Query is configured the same way as an Advanced Search (Query). Unlike an Advanced Search (Query), you cannot save the Instant Query search you define. If you expect to repeat the search at a later time, you should define it and save it as an Advanced Search (Query). See Defining a Personnel Advanced Search (Query) on Page 33 for more information. To Run an Instant Query 1. Click the Personnel pane button. The Personnel pane opens with Quick Search visible. 2. Click the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar and select Personnel. 3. Click Advanced. 4. Click Instant Query to define a basic Instant Query, or click the down arrow to show the available Instant Query types. Click on one of these choices to open the Query Parameters dialog box for that query type. P New Query... P Instant Query... CI Basic Configuration Personnel Group Personnel Audt Log Personnellournal The Query Parameter dialog box for the Instant Query you have chosen opens. F igu re 4: Query Parameter Dialog Box PSSeclilow. l< Stied qm, c /al ecS; OWY De,* _Ld Opera hoe r✓tu Ts* 1/48 it 5. You can click El in the Predefined Query field to select a previously saved Personnel quay, make changes to the quay in the Query Details table, and click Run to run the query. Alternatively, you can click Add to add query statements to the Query Details table, and click Run to run this quay 32 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226845 Searching for Personnel 6. The results of the query are displayed as a Dynamic View in the C•CURE 9000 Administration Workstation Content area. For more information on the details of defining and running an Instant Query, see the chapter on Queries in the C•CURE 9000 Data Views Guide, and the online Help for Instant Query (click Fl to display the online Help). Defining a Personnel Advanced Search (Query) If you expect to perform a particular search multiple times, you should define and save an advanced search (Query). You create a Query using the Query Editor. You can create a Query to search for any C•CURE 9000 object, but in this case the focus is on creating a Query to search for Personnel objects. You define an advanced search by creating rows in the Query Criteria table that specify what you want to search for. If you define multiple rows, you specify how each row is related to the other rows (AND/OR logical operator). To Define a Personnel Query 1. Click the Personnel pane button. 2. The Personnel pane opens with Quick Search visible. 3. Click the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar and select Personnel. 4. Click Advanced. 5. Click New Query to open the Query Editor (see Figure 5 on Page 34) to create a new advanced search. New Query... Instant Query... Create a new query for object: (Personnel) 6. Type a name for your Personnel Query in the Name field. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 33 EFTA01226846 Searching for Personnel Figure 5: Query Editor e Voe•v i4lavesedCbre crexeCoat PO© se•e Pomace paerw Oda& totli4B3Mvp &teem: I A./cancel I Ili,' ee wt Mbar Oueey Gera Add live:ens least Cortismatal meek* I Fla r Appe WIN rugtr. Opegeta lwe Fitt Twe Yea Roavi Fed lire AM: 7. Type a description for your Personnel Query in the Description field. A description should give enough information so that an Operator who is unfamiliar with your queries can tell what the query is searching for. 8. To begin defining the search criteria for the query, click Add A new row appears in the Query Criteria table. 9. Choose the kind of object you want to search for from the drop-down list in the Object Type Column. To search for persons, choose Personnel. 10. Choose a field to search on from the drop-down list in the Held column. Example: To search on Last Names, pick LastName 11. Choose a filter type from the drop-down list in the Filter Type column. Example: If you intend to search for Last Names that begin with the letters "Bro" choose Starts With for the filter type. 12. In the Value column, type the value that you want to search for. Example: If you intend to search for Last Names that begin with the letters "Bron type in "Bre (without the quotes). 13. For each row, you can specify whether or not you want to give the Operator running the Query the ability to change the search criteria. If you select Prompt, when an Operator runs the search, a dialog box appears to allow them to modify each row that has Prompt enabled. Example: 34 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226847 Searching for Personnel If you enable Prompt for a row that searches for LastNames starting with "Bro", the Operator can choose a different value from the dialog that appears. 14. You can also add grouped search expressions by clicking Add Group. Example: If you want to search for Personnel who have an Employee Type of Contractor and a value of 0 in the Logicall field, and from that group, find those people with Operator privileges, you could add a group to a search for Operators that added a search criteria for both Employee Type and Logicall. 15. To save the Query, click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 35 EFTA01226848 Searching for Credentials for Personnel Searching for Credentials for Personnel You can define a Query on the Query Editor that searches for Credentials based on some attribute of the Card's Personnel record and/or the Personnel Child records. Once you have a list of these Credentials on a Dynamic View, you can use Set Property from the right-click Context Menu to edit these Credentials in bulk. Example: Suppose you want to find the Credentials for all the Personnel in your database who are Contractors so you can change the dates when their Credentials will expire. Adapting the procedure described in Defining a Personnel Advanced Search (Query) on Page 33, create a Quay with the parameters shown in the following table. (If you expect to repeat the search at a later time, you should save it as an Advanced Search [Query].) Query Target Type: Credential Operator Type Field Filter Type Value In Personnel Personnel Type Equals Contractor The query returns a Dynamic View list of the Credentials for all Personnel who have "Contractor" as their Personnel Type. You could then select all or some of the Contractors and use the Set Property option from the right-click context menu to set an Expiration Date for their Credentials. NOTE You could also use Credential as the target type in a Quay to retrieve a list of Credentials with access to (Clearances for) a particular Door. For more detailed information on configuring and using Queries see the Quay chapter in the C• CURE 9000 Data Views Guide. 38 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226849 Personnel Editor Personnel Editor A C•CURE 9000 Personnel record is used to store information about people who can access your site, including their access credentials and their clearances (the doors and locations they are allowed to access). The Personnel Editor is used to enter information about each person. The following sections provide more information about using Personnel to define Personnel records. ■ Personnel Editor Tabs on Page 37 ■ Personnel Tasks on Page 37 Personnel Editor Tabs The Personnel Editor stores personnel information on several tabbed views. The following sections give more information about each Personnel tab and how to use it. ■ Personnel General Tab on Page 46. ■ Personnel Credentials Tab on Page 54. ■ Personnel Clearances Tab on Page 64. ■ Personnel Customer Tab on Page 67. ■ Personnel Customer Extended Tab on Page 69. ■ Personnel Images Tab on Page 71. ■ Personnel Badging Tab on Page 77. ■ Personnel Previous Doors Tab on Page 81. ■ Personnel User-defined Fields Tab on Page 83. ■ Personnel Custom Clearance Tab on Page 84 ■ Personnel Documents Tab on Page 91 ■ Personnel Personnel Triggers Tab on Page 96 Personnel Tasks You can perform the following tasks with the Personnel Editor to configure Personnel records. ■ Personnel Object Tasks on Page 18 ■ Accessing the Personnel Editor on Page 38. ■ Selecting a Personnel View on Page 39. ■ Searching for Personnel on Page 30. ■ Using the Personnel List Context Menu on Page 39 to set properties of one or more personnel objects, add personnel to groups, export personnel records and Image, batch print badges, and other functions. ■ Exporting Personnel Portraits on Page 42 ■ Configuring the Disable by Inactivity Pitpi.ess for Personnel Credentials on Page 44 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukla Chapter 2 37 EFTA01226850 Personnel Editor Accessing the Personnel Editor You can access the Personnel Editor from the C•CURE 9000 Personnel pane. To Access the Personnel Editor 1. Click the Personnel pane button in the Administration Station. 2. Select Personnel from the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar. 3. Click Ra m to open a Dynamic View showing all Personnel objects. 4. Double-click the name of the Person in the list that you want to edit (or right-click to display the context menu, then click Edit), and the Personnel Editor opens (see Figure 6 on Page 38). NOTE The figures in this chapter show the Personnel Editor Default Personnel Edit View. Because an Administrator can change the content of a Personnel View, adding or removing tabs and fields, as well as adding User Defined Fields, the Personnel Views you see may not look exactly like the figures in this document. See Default Personnel Views on Page 182 for more information. Figure 6: Personnel Editor W.. ...400n le,San wallow glint con.tP,Annottit'oe. ‘^' , "1 . 4 On.x.IW+..I Orr. WNW r•P , WON e. to. Orin. I NrreaD vs tans-, . tea Tvg)en Env X. ,. 114h illre Lac kw y...* 4µf.f Von.. Voites.....; Even' StiOrCoenta irrav 0•100Ztesedne.ora Nen* 6.00 CeeWO. cps Tat Ct•rs 0 0 Pron. ass Nye Pet•Al COPS; Mar* Pint*. DO'S wthErmilira Ler Ens! stew Maar Pnrcri Err Oplev POI lislihren Miry occnorega Ks￾ai• C Ca Het Yaile Leather e, 38 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Con figuration Guide EFTA01226851 Personnel Editor Selecting a Personnel View You can select a Personnel View that you are authorized to use from the Current View drop-down list. You may be assigned to use a Personnel View for creating a new Personnel record, and a separate Personnel View for editing an existing record. In this case, if you are editing an existing record, the view for creating a new record is not available from the Current View drop-down list. Two Default Personnel Views are included in C•CURE 9000, as shown in Figure 7 on Page 39. Your Administrator determines which Personnel Views are available to each Operator, so you may see a different list of available Views. When you close the Personnel editor, the view you used last is remembered, and the Personnel editor opens using that view the next time you run it. To Select a Personnel View 1. From the Personnel Editor, click a in the Current View field. 2. Choose the Personnel View you want to use from the drop-down list. Figure 7: Default PersonnelViews Current View: Default Persomel Ecit View °mei Cusco Default Persomel Edt View Personnel View with Portrak in Header Using the Personnel List Context Menu The Personnel context menu (see Figure 8 on Page 40) in the Dynamic View of Personnel includes the selections common to all objects, as well as additional selections specific to Personnel records. See Using the Object List Context Menu on Page 23 for more information on the common selections. You can select one or more Personnel in the Dynamic View (using SHIFf+Left-click and CTRL+Left-click) and perform functions such as Set properties, Add Personnel to Groups, Export Personnel records and Image, Batch Print Badges, using the context menu. See Table 3 on Page 40 for definitions of the Personnel-specific context menu selections. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 39 EFTA01226852 Personnel Editor Figure 8: Personnel List Context Menu a' Edit X Delete • Set property ▪ Add to group aa Export selection... Export selected Portraits... Find in Audit Log... Find in Journal... if` t Batch Print Badges • Change Partition Grace Personnel • Assign Clearances 611 Remove Clearances Remove Person From Area Antipassback Reset Card Area Lockout Grace Grace Carpool Group Assign Temporary Credential Show Associations Monitor Create From Template Table 3: Personnel List Context Menu Selection Description Export Selected Portrait Click this menu selection to open an Export Personnel Portraits dialog box from which you can specify the location and filename of the external file to which to export the Primary Image from the selected Personnel record. See Exporting Personnel Portra its on Page 42 for more information. Batch Print Badges This selection isavailable if you have configured Batch Printing in Options& Tools Badge Setup. Select one or more badges in the Personnel Dynamic View and click this menu selection to batch print the selected badge(s). Depending on your Badge Setup Printer Settings, the badges either print automaticaltyor are added to the Batch Print Queue. If the badges are queued. the C•CURE ID Batch Print Manager dialog boxopens to allow you to manage the print queue. From thisdialog you can choose to print these badges and a ny other badges currentty in the queue. Grace Personnel Click to clear the antipassback/timed antipassback information for selected Personnel and allow them access to the antipassback Area. For more information see the Areaschapter in the C•CURE 9000 Areasand Zones Guide. NOTE: If you select more than 100 Personnel, the Grace Personnel selection isnot available. 40 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226853 Personnel Editor Personnel List Context Menu (continued) Selection Description Assign Clearances Select one or more Personnel records from the Dynamic View, then right-click and select Assign Clearances. Ada log box appears that allows you to select one or more Clearances to add to the Personnel records you have chosen. Click OK to assign the Clearances. Adialog box appears to confirm that the Clearanceswere added, or explain why theywere not added. Click OK to close this dialog box. You can also Print or Email the contents of the dialog box. Remove Clearances Select one or more Personnel records from the DynamicView. then right-click and select Remove Clearances. Adialog box appears that allows you to select one or more Clearances to remove from the Personnel records you have chosen. Click OK to remove the Clearances. Adialog box appears to confirm that the Clearances were removed, or explain why they were not removed. Click OK to close th is d ialog box. You can also Print or Email the contents of thedialog box. Remove Person from Area Click to remove the selected Personnel from an Area so they no longer appear in any of the Area's Roll Call Reports. (If personnel swiped into an Area and then tailgated out, the system could have them erroneousty recorded as still being in the Area.) NOTE: This action requires a confirmation. It also warns you that it does not change the occupancy cou nts on the Area's STAR Controller and could take a while to complete. For more information see the Areas chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Areas and Zones Guide. Antipassback Reset Card Click to reset the iSTAR Global Antipassback owners of the selected Personners cards when that iSTAR owner isnot communicating. For more information see the Areas cha pter in the C•CURE 9000 Areas and Zones Guide. NOTE: if you select more than 100 Personnel, the Antipassback Reset Card selection isnot available. Area Lockout Grace Click to clear all running Area Lockout timers for the selected Personnel and to allow them one-time access to the target locked-out Areas. For more information see the Areas chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Areas and Zones Guide. NOTE: if you select more than 100 Personnel, the Area Lockout Grace selection is not available. Grace Carpool Group Click to clear the Antipassback/timed Antipassback information for the selected Personnel member(s) of one or more Carpool Groups (and all other members of the Carpool Groups) and allow them access to the Carpool Area. This is a 'imed' grace for which you must enter start/end times in a standard Manual Action dialog box. During that time period. everyone in the Carpool Group gets Free access to the Carpool Area. For more information see the Areas chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Areas and Zones Guide. NOTE: If you select more than 100 Personnel, the Grace Carpool Group selection isnot available. Activate Temporary Click to Activate a Temporary Credential. You can also use this function to change the Expiration date of the credential. Adialog box appears so that you can set the Expiration time span for the Temporary Credential. See Activating a Temporary Credential on Page 143 for more information. Assign Temporary Credential Click to assign a TemporaryCredentialto this Personnel record. A Name Selection dialog box appears listing the Temporary Credentials and their status. If you selected an Unassigned Temporary Credential, it is assigned to the person. If you select an Assigned or Activated Temporary Credential, a Warning appears that if you click OK, the Temporary Credentialwill be removed from the person it iscurrentty assigned to, and re-assigned to the person you had selected. If you click Cancel. no action is taken. Return Temporary Click to return a TemporaryCredentialto Unassigned status. You use this function when a person returns the access card to you when they no longer need it or it has expired. Once thecredentialhasa status of Unassigned, you can assign it to another person, as needed. Onty available for a Personnel record that has a Temporary Credential assigned. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 41 EFTA01226854 Personnel Editor Personnel List Context Menu (continued) Selection Description Show Association Click this menu selection to view a list of Security Objects associated with this Personnel record. For more information, see 'Showing Associations for an Object* in the C• CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. Create from Template Clid< tomato a new Personnel record from this Template. Avaiable only when you right-dick on a Personnel Template. Exporting Personnel Portraits You can use the Export selected Portraits context menu selection to export the Personnel primary portrait image from one or more records in a Personnel Dynamic View to a folder as .jpg format files. To Export Personnel Portraits 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select Personnel from the Personnel pane drop-down list). 3. Click Zia to open a Dynamic View listing all Personnel records. (You can also click the down-arrow of this button to either view the list in the current tabbed view or open a new tabbed view). 4. Select one or more Personnel records in the list and right-click. The Personnel context menu appears. 5. Select Export selected Portraits. The Export Personnel Portraits dialog box appears. 6. In the Output folder on the client field, click C to select a folder on the Administration Client system to store the exported Portraits. (You can alternatively type the name of an existing folder on the client system.) 7. In the Portrait name pattern field, you can click C to add a Personnel record field as part of the file name that is used to store the Portrait file. You can type in the field to customize the filename pattern (you could shorten the filename by removing the '(Object ID)' portion, for instance). Example: The default file pattern generates a filename such as Personnel Last, First (5000)jpg. If you select Text1 from this dialog box, the export would generate a filename such as Personnel Last, First (5000)Text1valuejpg 8. You can choose either Overwrite existing files or Rename existing files to determine how to deal with previously exported Portraits. ■ Overwrite existing files replaces existing files of the same name. ■ Rename existing files adds a .bak extension to existing files of the same name so that they are not overwritten. 9. Click Export to export the primary Portrait of the selected Personnel. A dialog box appears to list the Portraits that have been exported, and list any Personnel records that do not have Portraits associated with them. You can: ■ Print the contents of this dialog box. 42 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226855 Personnel Editor ■ Email the contents of this dialog box. ■ Open Folder to view the folder where the Portraits were exported ■ Click OK to close the dialog box. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 43 EFTA01226856 Configuring the Disable by Inactivity Process for Personnel Credentials Configuring the Disable by Inactivity Process for Personnel Credentials You can configure your C•CURE 9000 system to automatically disable those personnel credentials (cards) that have been inactive for a specified amount of time. You can define the required inactivity period plus the time of day when this Disable by Inactivity service kicks off, as well as being able to exempt particular personnel from the process. NOTE Only Card Admits are considered 'card activity' by the Disabling for Inactivity service. Card Rejects do not count. For information on how the Disabling by Inactivity process works with MAS and SAS servers, see Disabling Credentials for Inactivity in an Enterprise Environment on Page 27. The following tasks are relevant to the Disable by Inactivity process: ■ To Configure your System to Disable Inactive Personnel Credentials on Page 44 ■ To Exempt Personnel from having Inactive Credentials Disabled on Page 45 To Configure your System to Disable Inactive Personnel Credentials 1. Set the appropriate values for the two relevant System Variables in the Personnel category, Disable by Inactivity Enabled and Disable by Inactivity Scan Time. NOTE In an Enterprise Environment, these System Variables must be configured on each individual MAS/SAS server since credentials must be expired on their own server. (Global Personnel's Credentials are expired by the MAS server, but using information propagated from each SAS server.) a. In the Administration Station, on the Options & Tools pane, select System Variables and expand the Personnel category on the General tab. b. In the Name column, locate the Disable by Inactivity Enabled system variable, click in the Value field, and change False to True. c. Locate the Disable by Inactivity Scan Time system variable and double-click on the row to edit it. d. On the System Variables Editor Inactivity Scan Time Variable tab, - Enter the time every day (the hour and minute [in UTCD, when the scan will begin and then find and disable all Personnel Credentials whose lack of activity meets the Inactivity Period value set for their Personnel Type. — Click Save and Close. e. Click to close the System Variables General tab. 2. Configure the Inactivity Period for the Personnel Types defined for your site. a. In the Navigation Pane, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane and select Personnel Type from the pane drop-down list. b. Click s6i. to open a Dynamic View listing all the Personnel Types in your system. c. Double-click the specific Personnel Type in the list whose Inactivity Period you wish to set. Example: Contractor 44 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226857 Configuring the Disable by Inactivity Process for Personnel Credentials NOTE d. On the Personnel Type Editor, in the Inactivity Period field, specify the number of days that must elapse without any card activity for Credentials belonging to Personnel with this designated Personnel Type before an enabled and running Disable by Inactivity service disables these Credentials. The valid range for the number of days you can enter in this field is 3 - 2000. If the default value of 0 (zero) is left, the Disable by Inactivity service will ignore Personnel with this Personnel Type. e. Click Save and Close. f. Repeat the steps for any other Personnel Types for which you want to set Inactivity Periods. 3. Assign a Personnel Type with a specific Inactivity Period to a Personnel Record. a. Follow the procedure in Setting the Personnel Type on Page 49. b. Click Save and Close. To Exempt Personnel from having Inactive Credentials Disabled 1. On the Personnel pane, select Personnel from the pane drop-down list and then: Click New to create a new Personnel Record. - or - Click to open the Personnel Dynamic View and select the desired Personnel Record. 2. In the Options box on the General tab, click to select the Inactivity Exempt option check box. 3. Click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 45 EFTA01226858 Personnel General Tab Personnel General Tab The Personnel General tab lets you identify a person, set their Personnel ID, Person Type, Operator Name, Email Address, Escort Option, and PIN. You can also set options for Disabled Access, Alternate Shunt, and Guard Tour, as well as site-specific organizational identifiers. Figure 6 on Page 38 shows the Personnel General tab. See Personnel General Tab Definitions on Page 46 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel General Tab. General Tab Tasks See the following sections for instruction on performing these tasks. ■ Setting the Personnel Type on Page 49 ■ Choosing an Operator Name on Page 50 ■ Setting Options on Page 51 ■ Setting an Email Address on Page 52 ■ Setting the Escort Option on Page 52 ■ Setting a General PIN on Page 53 Personnel General Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel General tab are shown in Table 4 on Page 46. Table 4: Personnel General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description First Name T he first name of the person. This field isnot required. Middle Name The middle name of the person. This field isnot required. Last Name The last name of the person. The Last Name field is required. Personnel ID This field contains a system generated ID number for this person. This field is read-only. Personnel Type Click 0 to choose a Personnel type for this Personnel record by clicking and selecting from the dialog box that appears. The system provides four Personnel Types: Employee, Co nt ractor,Vialtor, and None. None is the default value. You can use the Personnel Type Editor to configure the following: • Additional Personnel Types to meet your site's needs. Example: A Personnel Type called Temporary could be added if your site wanted to identify temporary personnel. • Inactivity Periods for specific Personnel Types, which allows Personnel Records with this type to be disabled if their credentials have been inactive for that length of time. For more information see Personnel Type Overview on Page 100. 46 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226859 Personnel General Tab Personnel General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Operator Name Use this field to identify this person as an Operator who can run C•CURE 9000 applications, such as the Administration workstation and the Monitoring Station. If this person is not intended to be a C•CURE 9000 Operator, leave this field blank. Click ri to select an Operator for this Personnel record from the list of Operatorsdefined for your system. Each Operator is a person with a Windows system account. NOTE: Each Operator can be assigned to only one Personnel record. If you try to assign an Operator to a Personnel record and that Operator is already assigned to another Personnel record, an error message appears and you cannot save the record. P.,,n.: A read-only field displaying the partition to which this Personnel record belongs. This field is visible only if the C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned. Options Disabled Select this option if you want to deny this person access. All of this person's access credentials will be denied access as long as Disabled is selected. Checking this box does not cause any of the person'saccesscredentials to be marked as Disabled on the Credentials tab, but none of thesecredentialswillgrant access as long as Disabled is selected on the General tab. Alternate Shunt (ADA) Select this option to cause the alternate shunt relays for ADA (Americans with Disabikties Act) door timings to be activated whenever this person isgranted access to a door equipped with these options. Alternate shunt relays typically provide additional time for a person to go through a door without causing an alarm condition. (See the C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide chapter on Doors ). PIN Exempt (ADA) Select thisoption so that a person seeking access at a reader oonfigured on the Reader Keypad tab for both Card and PIN Required and Allow PIN Exempt does not have to enter the PIN. This is useful for disabled personnel with limited use of their fingers or for those who would have difficulty reaching the reader. Noticed Select thisoption to track activities by this person: • Displays the Noticed tag in access/reject admit messages. • Triggers any Noticed Eventsdefined when Doorswere configured. Antipassback Exempt Select this option to make this person exempt from antipassback rules (regular and timed) for all Areas. The person is permitted entry to/exit from antipassback Areas regardlessof a violation. While no violation messages are generated/bgged, access activity is logged as usual. Activate Antipassback Event Select this option so this person activates a ntipassback events—whether or not the person is antipassback exempt—if the access/exit would ordinarilycause a violation. Keypad Command Administrator Select thisoption to enable this person to use Keypad Commands even if the person is not in a Personnel Group granted the Keypad Command permission. Intrusion Zone Administrator Select this option to enable this person to Arm/Disarm Intrusion Zones using the Card swipe Arm/Disarm methods even if the person is not in the Personnel Group configured for that Intrusion Zone. Inactivity Exempt Select thisoption to indicate that this person'scxedentialscannot be disabled due to a lack of activity in the system. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 47 EFTA01226860 Personnel General Tab Personnel General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Can Perform Guard Tour Select thisoption to enable this person to be assigned to perform a Guard Tour. See the C•CURE 9000 Guard Tours Guide tor detailed information about Guard Tours. Can Host Visits Select th is option to enable this person to act as a Visit Host for Visitor Management. a separately licensed feature. See the C•CURE 9000 Visitor Management Guide for detailed information. Web Email and Logon Email address Enter an Email address for this Personnel record. This field isnot required. However, d an Email address isdefined and this person neither of the following, he/she will receive the appropriate email notification: • A member of a Personnel Group that is used as an Email Group. • Enabled to perform Guard Tours and assigned to run a specific scheduled Tour. See the C•CURE 9000 Guard Tours Guide for detailed information about Guard Tours. • A person who is ebgible to host Visits can use email and a password (Basic Authentication) to login to the Visitor Management Web Portal. Windows Principal Enter a Windows domaiMusername combination for Personnel who are eligible to use Windows Authentication to access the Visitor Management Web Portal as a Host of Visits. This username must be unique on a standalone server. It also must be unique within an Enterprise, or a replication conflict willoccur. The Personnel editor cannot validate Enterprise uniqueness. Alternatively, Basic Authentication via an Email address can be used to access the Visitor Management Web Portal by a person who is eligible to host Visits. Escort Options Escort Option Click the down-arrow to choose an Escort Option for this Personnel record by selecting from the drop-down that appears. The system provides the following four options: • Unescorted Visitor - A Visitor to the company who is permitted to go through the facildy without an Escort. • Escorted Visitor -AVisitor to the company who must be accompanied by an employee designated as an Escort in order to move through the facility. • Escort- an Employee trained in using the visitor management policies of the company, who knowswhat to do in anyof the following situations: - Escorted Visitoescard fails for clearance. - An employee wants to cut in front of or in the middle of the Escorted Visitor queue. • None - the default value. 48 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226861 Personnel General Tab Personnel General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description PIN PIN Defines the Personal Identification Number for this Person. This PIN is used for readers that require Card Access Followed by PIN. The PIN is encrypted when stored in the database. If the Display PIN system variable is set to False: • The PIN is not visible anywhere in the C•CURE 9000 system. • This field displays asterisks when the cursor is in the field. • A Confirmation window opens when you change the value, then move the cursor to a different field. You need tore-enter the PIN to confirm its value. If the UseGeneral PINFo rPi NOn ly system variable is set to True. this field is read-onty. The number of dig its in the PIN is determined by the PINLength value set in Options & Too is >System Variables. (The maximum size allowed s9.) Modification History Last Edited On The Date and Time of the last edit of this Personnel record. This field is updated by the system and is read-only. Last Edited By Name of the Operator who last edited the General tab data for this personnel record. This field is updated by the system and is read-only. Personnel Record Options Save and Close Click Save and Close when you have completed anychanges to the Personnel record and wish to save those changes. The Personnel Editor closes. Save and New Click Save and New when you have completed anychanges to the Personnel record and wish to save those changes, and then want to create a new Personnel record. The Personnel record you were editing is saved, and a new Personnel record opens (either blank or including template information if you were using a template to create new Personnel records). Save Click Save when you have made anychanges to the Personnel record and wish to save these changes without dosing the editor—in order to continue configuring the record. NOTE: If another user editing the same record saves their changeswhile you are editing it, the following error message displays when you dick Save: 'Cannot save. The object has changed since you last loaded it:. Current View This field shows the currently selected Personnel View, and the drop-down list shows the other Personnel Views that can be selected. The Current View field only shows the Personnel Views that the Operator can access. Close al Click Close when you want to close the Personnel Editor without saving your changes. A prompt appears so that you can choose to continue editing or dose the editor. Click OK to close the editor without saving changes. or dick Cancel to continue editing the Personnel record. Setting the Personnel Type The Personnel Type field lets you categorize each Personnel record in your database based on the person's role or type. By default you can choose Employee, Contractor, Visitor, or None. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 49 EFTA01226862 Personnel General Tab You can also define additional Personnel Types to suit your site, however. For example, if you want to identify Personnel records as Security Personnel, Maintenance Personnel, Temporary Employees, or any other category, you can create these new Personnel Types with the Personnel Type Editor (see Personnel Type Overview on Page 100), and then assign the new type to Personnel records in your database. In addition, the Personnel Type you assign to a Personnel record can control the following ■ Whether or not their Credential(s) can be disabled for lack of activity in the system. ■ The number of days without valid card activities before a running Disable by Inactivity service disables the Credential(s). For more information, see Disabling Credentials for Inactivity Overview on Page 26 To Set the Personnel Type 1. From the Personnel General Tab, click Select ri in the Personnel Type field to open a selection dialog listing available Personnel Types. 2. Click a Personnel Type in the list to select that Personnel Type. You can also click the Actions button tai and select New to create a new Personnel Type for this person or Edit to modify an existing Personnel Type. For more information about the Actions button, see the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. 3. To save the Personnel Type, click Save and Close. Choosing an Operator Name You choose an Operator name to give a person the ability to run C•CURE 9000 applications, such as the Administration Workstation or the Monitoring Station. You choose an Operator Name from a list of Operators configured for your system. Operators are configured using the Configuration Pane Operator Editor. An Operator name is related to a specific Windows user account, and has a defined set of Privileges that determine exactly which functions and features of C•CURE 9000 the Operator can and cannot access. Example: An Operator whose job it is to enter Personnel data may not be able to run the Monitoring Station, view Hardware status, unlock doors, or view video. To Choose an Operator Name 1. From the Personnel General Tab, click Select n in the Operator Name field to open a selection dialog listing available Operators. 2. Click a name in the list to select that Operator. 3. If there are no available or appropriate Operators in the list, you need to create one for the person. Click the Actions button La and select New to create a new Operator or Edit to modify an existing Operator. Then repeat the previous steps. For more information about the Actions button, see the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. 4. To save the Operator Name, click Save and Close. 50 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226863 Personnel General Tab Setting Options You t-mi seta number of options fora Personnel record from the Personnel General tab. To Set Options 1. Select Disabledif you want to deny this person access. All of this person's access credentials and their PIN will be denied access as long as Disabled is selected. If you select this option, the person will not be able to gain access using any of their access cards or their PIN. Checking this box does not cause any of the person's access credentials to be marked as disabled on the Credentials tab, but none of these credentials will grant access as long as Disabled on the General tab is selected. 2. Select Alternate Shunt (ADA) to cause the alternate shunt relays for ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) door timings to be activated whenever this person is granted access to a door equipped with these options. Alternate shunt relays typically provide additional time for a person to go through a door without causing an alarm condition. For more information, see the C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide chapter on Doors. 3. Select PIN Exempt (ADA) so a disabled person seeking access at a reader configured for both "Card and PIN Required" and "Allow PIN Exempt" does not have to enter the PIN on the keypad. For information, see the C•CURE 9000 Hardware Configuration Guide section on iSTAR Readers. 4. Select Noticed to set this Personnel record so that access attempts are marked with the Noticed flag (allowing you to track these attempts). If the Noticed Rag is selected, the journal message displays "Noticed" when an access attempt occurs. 5. Select Antipassback Exempt to make this person exempt from antipassback rules (regular and timed) for all Areas. The person is permitted entry to/exit from an antipassback Area regardless of a violation). If this option is selected, no violation message are generated/logged, but access activity is logged as usual. 6. Select Activates Antipassback Event so this person activates antipassback events—whether or not the person is antipassback exempt—if the access/exit would ordinarily cause a violation . 7. Select Keypad Command Administrator to enable this person to be able to use Keypad Commands even if the person is not in a Personnel Group granted the Keypad Command permission. If this option is selected, this person can use any Keypad Commands regardless of the Personnel Group the command is validated for. 8. Select Intrusion Zone Administrator to enable this person to Arm/Disarm Intrusion Zones using the Card swipe Arm/Disarm methods even if the person is not in the Personnel Group configured for that Intrusion Zone. 9. Select Inactivity Exempt to enable this person to be exempt from having credentials disabled because of inactivity, . If this option is selected, this person's credentials cannot be disabled even if they have not been active for the amount of time configured for their assigned Personnel Type. 10. Select Can Perform Guard Tour to enable this person to be able to perform Guard Tours. If this option is selected, this person can be assigned to walk any Guard Tour. See the C•CURE 9000 Guard Tours Guide for detailed information about Guard Tours. 11. Select Can Host Visits to allow this person to act as a Visit Host for Visitor Management, a separately licensed feature. See the C•CURE 9000 Visitor Management Guide for detailed information. 12. To save the Options Settings, click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 51 EFTA01226864 PersonnelGeneraiTab Setting an Email Address You can define an Email address for a person on the Personnel General tab. 'then, if the person is either of the following: ■ A member of a Personnel Group that becomes used as an Email Group, he/she will receive any Email sent to that Group. ■ Enabled on the Personnel General tab to perform Guard Tours and assigned on the Guard Tour Scheduling Editor to run a specific scheduled Tour, he/she will receive email notification of the Tour—if that option is selected. ( See the C•CURE 9000 Guard Tours Guide for detailed information about Guard Tours.) To Set an Email Address 1. From the Personnel General tab, click in the Email field. 2. Type the Email address for this Personnel record. 3. To save the address, click Save and Close. Setting the Escort Option You can configure a person's Escort option—None, Unescorted Visitor, Escorted Visitor, Escort—which controls how he/she is able to move around a facility, through its Doors and into and out of Areas. To Configure a Person% Escort Option 1. Click the Personnel drop-down list and select Personnel. 2. Click New to create a new Personnel record. - or - Click IS to open a Dynamic View showing a list of all existing Personnel Objects, right-click the Personnel record you want to change, and click Edit from the context menu that appears. The Personnel Editor opens with the General Tab displayed. 3. In the Escort Options box, click the down-arrow next to the combo box and select the Escort Option you want for this Personnel record: • None (the default) • Unescorted Visitor - A Visitor to the company who is permitted to go through the facility without an Escort. • Escorted Visitor - A Visitor to the company who must be accompanied by an employee designated as an Escort in order to move through the facility. • Escort - an Employee trained in using the visitor management policies of the company, who knows what to do in any of the following situations: 4. To save the Personnel Escort Option, click Save and Close. 52 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226865 PersonnelGeneralTab Setting a General PIN You can set a general Personal Identification Number (PIN) for a person on the Personnel General tab. There are three System Variables (choose Options & Tools>System Variables, then double-click Personnel) that affect the General PIN. ■ If the Display PIN System Variable is set to False, the actual PIN number is not displayed, it is replaced by "•" characters. If the Display PIN System Variable is set to True, the PIN numbers are visible. ■ If the Use General PIN for PINOnly Access System Variable is set to True, the PIN on the General tab will be the same as the PIN on the PINOnly access credential. If you Auto Generate a PIN on the Credentials tab, it replaces the General PIN, and the General PIN field is no longer editable. ■ The length of the PIN is set in the System Variable PINLength. The PIN length can be from 3-9 digits long. The default value is 4. NOTE A general PIN differs from a PIN-Only credential. A general PIN is used in conjunction with an access card at designated reader and keypad combinations to gain access to a location. A PIN-only access credential is used at keypad-only access locations in place of a access card. You can define a PIN-only credential on the Personnel Credentials tab. To Set a General PIN 1. From the Personnel General tab, click in the PIN field. 2. In the PIN field, type the PIN for this Personnel record. 3. If your system is set up to not display the PIN number, a dialog box appears asking you to validate the PIN you entered by retyping it in the dialog box. 4. To save the PIN, click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 53 EFTA01226866 Personnel Credentials Tab Personnel Credentials Tab The Credentials tab allows you to add and configure access credentials for a person. For each credential, you can specify the type, format, activation and expiration dates, and current status. Figure 9 on Page 54 shows the Personnel Credentials tab. The fields in the lower part of the Credentials tab are not active until you click Add Card Access. Then you can enter information into the fields. Personnel Credential Tab Tasks ■ Activating and Expiring Access Cards on Page 59 ■ Adding an Access Card on Page 61 ■ Adding a PIN-Only Access Credential on Page 62 ■ Removing an Access Card on Page 62 ■ Validating a CHUID on Page 63 Presonnel Credential Tab Definitions See Personnel Credentials Tab Definitions on Page 55 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Credentials tab. Figure 9 on Page 54 shows the Personnel Credentials tab. Figure 9: PersonnelCredentials Tab we <tr. ,at. AS'? W.. troxyla t s t 4•.• - 4•-tl 0(.4* PO.,COMI (+Otte I C.A.,. (.94,f1 'rota I •c"! tun, (*.vs. Arvu.0e. PevM•gp•I trwisk(si " • r^`,"••• (.-..I (.H -.e. Pell fp (IWO fop arbriorif a.- •I Sw.1,04411 (..lei ts PPICettinti PM( I e• I • cant C4O.12 C40543 Oar.r tioUla I 9191railasetatitir •.n__. eat If your system has User-defined Credentials fields, a new tab can be added to a Personnel View Credentials tab to contain Credential fields that were added to the Personnel View. Figure 10 on Page 55 shows the Personnel View called Personnel View with Portrait in Header, which has a User-defined Fields tab positioned on the Credentials tab. See the User-defined Fields chapter in the C• CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information about User-defined fields. 54 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226867 Personnel Credentials Tab Figure 10: Credentials Tab with User-defined FieldsTab ilreath.) 45x .0 Ms ASA" Cint*In• ivamt ...wit rano n ousts • tilkled PM. WNW., I UMW r ?friatea I Pr MIN.. I End edam Ind i Owinw I C‘•••••I 4•••• I a Sin I Goon Own j ...r b....I ilw•indra%th I h..... I Pesal sal Codsted GOV.. (maw TM O9O5.M CaS60110. a...a i (ma...rat I uwarasra• I swasns• crew., r Cal Heim I -U-I MOM r cl$O rinser foist r • he ,Cob beallook. _I r r , - tens* osyxteCv* 1 Mfrs Sw•Cid. array I I sat am OOPS, paur. I DOD Personnel Credentials Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Credentials tab are shown in Table 5 on Page 55. Table 5: Personnel Credentials Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Credential Table Credential ID The sequence number for each Credential is inaemented for each Credential for a given person. This value is unique and thus useful for importing Personnel and their credentials. This value is auto-generated and cannot be changed. Card Number Card Number is a value up to 20 digits in length (with a maximum value of 18446744073709551615). The card number is manualty typed in and need not be unique as long as the CHUID of which it is a part of is unique. The ca rd number length maybe limited to less than 20 digits by the CHUID format you are using. Example: A card number of 333 with a facikty oode of 2 would not conflict with a card number of 333 with a facility code of 3. if the teary code was part of the CHUID.) Three fields are filled in when you type a card number in this field: • The Card Number field in the Credentials data grid. • The read onll, Card Number field. • The read onty CHUID Fo mat field. Fora PIN-Only credential. the Label PIN isdisplayed in the Card Number field. The PIN itself is never displayed in this table. Access Type The Access Type for each Credential. The value is set to Card Access if you cbckAdd Card Access cr PIN-Only if you click Add Pin Only Access. C-CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 55 EFTA01226868 Personnel Credentials Tab PersonnelCredentialsTab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description CHUID Format This field shows the CHUID format chosen for each credential. Click the field and then click El to choose a CHUID format. A Selection dialog box opens. listing the applicable enabled CHUID formats. Fora PIN-Onty credential. the PIN-On ty CHUID format is a utomaticalty chosen and cannot be changed. Credential Status This read-onty field shows the setting from the Card Status fields: • if none of the Card Status fields are selected, and the current date is behveen the Activation and Expiration Dates on this tab, the status is Act ive. • if today's date is outside of the Activation and Expiration Dates range, the status is Expired. • If the Credential has been marked as Lost and/or Stolen, the status is Lost or Stolen. • If the credential has been manualtydisabled (either by selecting Disabled on the General tab to disable allcredentials. or Disabled on the Credential tab to disable a specdic credential) then the status is Disabled. • if the credential has been a utomaticalty disabled by the Disable by inactivity Service, the status is Disabled by inactivity. NOTE: For information, see Disabling C redentia is for inactivity Overview on Page 26 if the System Variable Credential Expired Status Color has been assigned a color value, an Expired card is displayed with that color background. If the System Variable Credential Active Status Color has been assigned a color value, an Active isdisplayed with that color background. *II (WC."( I Amen , ..fawieve ,f, 2.100 Ott threats r...Painorr , , • ...^ ' Genii Cal Wets haw boo Mr row/ C.:fermi Stabs 7 7 W., Ceseueu Cr10,4 El, . wail Iowa See UI Settings in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide ter more information. Standard Fields Card Number A read-onty field displaying the Card Number entered into the Credentials table for this record. Generate a Unique Random Card Number ra—ii -7: Click this button to assign a unique random card number to this credential. This card number contains up to the maximum number of digits for the CHUID format chosen for the credential. For example, the defautt 'Card OM/ CHUID format generatescard numbers with no more than ten digits. Three fields are filled in when Generate Unique Random Card Number is pressed: • The Card Number field in the Credentialsdata grid. • The read onty Card Number field • The read onty CHUID format field This behavior is the same as if a manual entry had been made into the Card Number field of the Credentialsdata grid. Facilely Code The Facility Code for thecredential. entered manua Sy. which can be up to 9223372036854775807, unless lim ited by the CHUID Format. Issue Code The issue Code, usualty used to indicate the number of times the credential has been issued. The value can be up to 2147483647, as limited by CHUID Format. 56 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226869 Personnel Credentials Tab PersonnelCredentials Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Smart ID Vest's onty if a Smart ID CHUID format has been enabled. Represents a 128-bit field used for Smart Card credentials. Thisfield is read-onty unless you select a CHUID format created from the Smart ID CHUID Template (see CHUID Format Overview on Page 168. If you select a Smart ID CHUID format, the values you enter into the Smart ID field are used to populate the CardInt2. CardInt3. and CardInt4 fields. and to generate the read-onty CHUID field. Activation The Activation Date for the credential. The time defaults to the time the credentia I was created Expiration Defines the Date and Time when this Card is considered expired. For new credentials, this is set to the number of years specified in the System Options to be added to the Activation Date Time. Badge Layout Select the Badge Layout to be used for thiscredentialfrom the list of badge layouts in this selection list. Mobile Number Visible onty d the Smart ID Personnel System Variable is enabled, and you add the field to a Personnel View (PersonnelViews Editor on Page 182). See the System Variables chapter in the C• CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for information about System Variables. The Mobile Number field is read onty. Its value is assigned via an external enrollment application. Card Status Lost Use this selection to indicate that a badge has been reported lost. (Not applicable to PIN-Ontycredentials.) Stolen Use this selection to indicate that thecredential has been reported stolen. Disabled Use this selection to indicate that the badge has been manualtydis.abled. Disabled by Inactivity This read-on ty field indicates that the credential was d is.abled by the Disable by inactivity process. The process sets both the Disabled by inactivity check boxand the Disabled check box to True ( v. ). If you clear (NJ the Disabled check box, the Disabled by inactivity check box is also cleared, and the Disabled by Inactivity date is recalculated to restart with the current date. The Disabled by Inactivitydate is also recalculated to restart with the current date if the Lost or Stolen check boxes are cleared. NOTE: For information. see Disabling Credentials for Inactivity Overview on Page 26. Expired This check box is set to True( ) when the Expiration date has passed. Temporary BLE Visible onty if the Smart ID Personnel System Variable is enabled. and you add the field to a Personnel View (PersonnelViews Editor on Page 182). See the System Varia bles chapter in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for information about System Variables. This check box indicates that this credential can be assigned to a mobile device and read by a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) Reader. If this box isnot checked, the Credential will not work at the BLE reader. Extended Fields Agency Code Identifies the government agency issuing the credential. System Code Identifiesthe system in which the card is enrolled and is unique for each site. Credential Series This field is available to reflect major system changes. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 57 EFTA01226870 Personnel Credentials Tab Personnel Credentials Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Credential Issue A value that is set to '1' the first time a card is issued, and is incremented by one whenever a replacement card is issued. The code can be up to 20 digits in length. but the usual length in a government card format is 1 digit. HMAC Hash Message Authentication Code. This value is unique for each card record, and iscalculated by smart card readers based on card data, the site key, and the hashing algorithm used by the reader. The HMAC for a card can be different based on the reader type at which the card is presented because different reader manufacturers use different hashing algorithms. Asa result, you may have to configure multiple card records for a given physical card if that card will be used for access at multiple reader types. Set this value to 0 for non-extended cards. Cardintl￾Cardlnt4 Cardlnt fieldsare user-named fieldsprovided for proprietary extended card fields that you may use at your site. CHUID The Card Holder Unique Identifier (CHUID) is a number generated by the system, based on the CHUID Format and the values in other credential fields. The CHUID has an 80-Digit Maximum and a 10-Digit Minimum. It must have an even number of digits. MCHUIDS in the system. regardlessof the format used, must have the same length, so CHUIDs using a shorter CHUID Format are padded with 0s. PIN Credential PIN PIN (Personal Identification Number) is a number assigned to a cardholder. The card holder uses this PIN at keypads when required. Use this field only if your card readers have keypads. This PIN field on the Credentials tab is used for PIN-only access credentials. If you are using a General PIN. the PIN is displayed on the General tab. Auto Generate Click this button to generate a unique PIN number for a PIN-Only credential. When you click the button. a dialog appears to show you the generated PIN. This is the only time the PIN is displayed, so you need to communicate it to the person who will be using the PIN. If you click the button again, a new PIN is generated to replace the previous one. If a person forgets their PIN, you must replace it with a new PIN. The PIN is encrypted when stored in the database, and there is no way to look it up. This button is available only if you are editing a PIN-Onlycredential. Miscellaneous Personnel Identifier An umber field usuallyused in Government extended format access cards. This field is optional and it need not have a unique value. Its maximum size can be 9223372036854775807. It can be included in a CHUID Format. in which case its length maybe limited by the CHUID format. Association Category An umber field usuallyused in Government extended format access cards. This field is optional, and it need not have a unique value. Its maximum size can be 9223372036854775807. It can be included in a CHUID Format. in which case its length may be limited by the CHUID format. Organizational Category A number field usually used in Government extended format access cards. Thisfield is optional, and it need not have a unique value. Its maximum size can be 9223372036854775807. It can be included in a CHUID Format, in which case its length maybe limited by the CHUID format. Organizational Identifier A number field usuallyused in Government extended format access cards. Thisfield is optional, and it need not have a unique value. Its maximum size can be 9223372036854775807. It can be included in a CHUID Format, in which case its length maybe limited by the CHUID format. 58 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226871 Personnel Credentials Tab Personnel Credentials Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Buttons Add Card Access Clid< this button to add a new accesscredential. This button is unavaiable if the person already has the maximum number of credentials. Add PIN Only Access Chck this button to add a new PIN-Only access credential. This button is unavailable if the person already has a PIN-Onty access credential (only one per person is allowed), or already has the maximum number of credentials. Also, a PIN-only CHUID format must be enabled for Add PIN Only Access to be available. Remove Click a Credential row, then dick Remove to remove the selected access Credential Validate CHUID Uniqueness Click this button tocheck whether the CHUID for this Personnel record is unique. A dialog box appears that displays the CHUID and states whether it is valid (unique) or not. Credentials Tab Tasks You can perform the following tasks from the Credentials tab: ■ Activating and Expiring Access Cards on Page 59. ■ Adding an Access Card on Page 61. ■ Adding a PIN-Only Access Credential on Page 62. ■ Removing an Access Card on Page 62. ■ Validating a CHUID on Page 63. You can add an access card to the list of Credentials for a Personnel record. A Personnel record can have many access credentials (up to five), depending on the value specified in the Personnel System Variable Maximum Cards Per Person. For information about System Variables see the C• CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. Activating and Expiring Access Cards The value of the Credential Status field on the Personnel Credentials tab determines whether or not an access card can be used to gain access. ■ A card with a status of Active can be used to gain access. ■ A card with a status of Expired, Lost, Stolen, Disabled, or Disabled by Inactivity cannot be used to gain access. a. You set the Credential Status for a card by changing the Activation and Expiration date/time of the Credential, as well as setting a Card Status Value (Lost, Stolen, or Disabled). - You can use the Activation and Expiration date/time fields to control when access cards you create become valid for use and when they are invalid. You can set an Activation and Expiration date when you created a Credential, but you can subsequently change these settings at a later time if the need arises. b. You cannot manually set the Credential Status of a card to Disabled by Inactivity yourself. You have to configure your C•CURE 9000 system to automatically disable cards that have not been active for a configured period of time. For information, see Disabling Credentials for Inactivity Overview on Page 26. Also see Configuring the Disable by Inactivity Plix.ess for Personnel Credentials on Page 44. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 59 EFTA01226872 Personnel Credentials Tab c. A Card Status of Temporary indicates that the card is a Temporary Credential. This status is independent of the other status settings. See Credential Editor on Page 132 for more information. Table 6 on Page 60 shows how to use the Activation and Expiration date/time fields to achieve a variety of Credential Status settings. Table 6: Setting the Credential Status To Make Credential Status... Settings Description AhvaysActive Activation date/time = Expiration date/time Example: Activation: 5/5/2009 11:55 PM Expiration: 5/5/2009 11:55:PM This setting allows you to set up a credential that does not expire. Both the date and time portions of the Activation and Expiration fields must match exactty. Active for Time Period Activation date/time < Expiration date/time and Expiration date/time >current date Example: Activation: 1/5/2008 11:55 PM Expiration: 5/5/2014 11:55:PM This setting allowsyou to set when a date when the credential first becomes Active. and when 4 becomes Expired. Lx..., 'Li Expiration date/time < current date Example: Activation: 1 /5/2008 11:55 PM Expiration: 5/5/2008 11:55:PM This setting albws you the set a credential as currentty Expired. It will never become Active if you do not change the Expiration date/time. Expired for Time Period Activation date/time > Expiration date/time Example: Activation: 1 /5/2011 11:55 PM Expiration: 9/20/2010 11:55:PM Allowsyou to make the Card Active before the Expiration date/time and after the Activation date/time, but is Expired between these dates. Example: If you have an employee who will be on a leave of absence for 3 months next year. you can have the card Active now. Expired during the absence. and Active when they return. This setting is allowed onty if you set the System Variable Allow Activation After Expiration to True. You can then save a credential with an Activation Date later than the Expiration Date. You can use this to expire cards for a period of time. and then activate them. The card is valid for use up until the Expiration Date, then is invalid for use until the Activation Date occurs. If this System Variable is set to False (the default value) you cannot save a credential with an Activation Date later than the Expiration Date. Fc• information about System Variables see the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. Lost Card Status vo Lost Credential Status is set to Lost: card is denied access. Stolen Card Status v# Stolen Credential Status is set to Stolen: card isdenied access. Disabled Card StatusE Disabled Credential Status is set to Disabled: card isdenied access. Expired By inactivity Card Status v. Expired By Inactivity CredentialStatus is set to Expired By inactivity: card is denied access. 60 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226873 Personnel Credentials Tab Setting the Credential Status (continued) To Make Credential Status... Settings Description Temporary Card Status N, Temporary Credential Status ts set to Temporary: accesss determined by other status settings. Adding an Access Card To Add an Access Card 1. From the Credentials tab of the Personnel Editor, click Add Card Access. (If this button is unavailable, it means that the maximum number of credentials for this Personnel record are already configured. See the system variable Maximum Cards Per Person in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide.) 2. A new row appears in the table listing the person's credentials. In addition, the Standard Fields, Extended Fields, Card Status, and PIN Credential fields below the table display the values for the currently selected credential. 3. Type the card number for this credential into the Card Number field in the selected table row. Optionally, you can click to generate a random card number. See Generate a Unique Random Card Number in Table 5 on Page 55 for more information. 4. If you want to change the default value of the CHUID format, click in the CHUID Format field on the table row, then click E to select a CHUID format from the list of CHUID formats (only Enabled CHUID formats are available for selection). 5. Review the values in the Standard Fields section of the Credentials tab, and modify them as needed. See Personnel Clearances Tab Definitions on Page 64 for definitions of these fields. 6. You can add a Badge Layout for this access card by clicking 0 in the Badge Layout field and selecting a Badge Layout from the dialog box that appears. See Badge Layout Editor on Page 162 for more information about Badge Layouts. You can also click the Actions button bej and select New to create a new Badge Layout for this access card or Edit to modify an existing Badge Layout. For more information about the Actions button, see the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide. 7. To modify the Credential Status, set the values of the Activation, Expiration, Lost, Stolen, or Disabled fields. See Activating and Expiring Access Cards on Page 59 for information on using these fields to set the Credential Status. • Select Lost to indicate that a badge has been reported lost. Not applicable to PIN-Only credentials. • Select Stolen to indicate that the credential has been reported stolen. • Select Disabled if you want to indicate that the badge has been manually disabled, thereby denying access to the person when they use any of their access cards or PIN. As long as Disabled on the General tab is selected on the General tab, the person's access attempts will be denied. You will still need to check this box to indicate the card has been manually disabled. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 81 EFTA01226874 Personnel Credentials Tab • The Expired field is set to True when the Expiration Date has passed. The Expiration field on this tab defines the Date and Time when this Card is considered expired. For new credentials, this will be set to the number of years specified in the System Options to be added to the Activation Date Time. 8. If you are using an Extended Card, you can modify the Extended Fields values as appropriate. See the Personnel Clearances Tab Definitions on Page 64 for definitions of these fields. 9. To save the Credentials settings, click Save and Close. Adding a PIN-Only Access Credential You can assign only one PIN-Only Access Credential to a Personnel record. However, the Add PIN-Only Access button may be unavailable if: ■ A Personnel record already has a PIN-Only Access Credential. ■ A Personnel Record already has the maximum number of Credentials, even if no PIN-Only Access Credential has been assigned. ■ You have not created and enabled a PIN Only CHUID Format from the PIN Only CHUID Format template (see CHUID Format Tasks on Page 171). You must use the Auto Generate button to generate a unique PIN when you use this option. If you have set the Display PIN System Variable to False, the generated PIN number is visible only in the PIN Confirmation dialog box that appears when you click Auto Generate. You must give the PIN information to the person who will use it for access at that time, because you cannot re-display the PIN. If the person forgets their PIN, you must Auto Generate a new PIN for the person. If the Display PIN System Variable is set to True, the PIN numbers are visible on the Credentials tab. To Add a PIN-Only Access Credential 1. From the Credentials tab of the Personnel Editor, click Add PIN Only Access. 2. Click Auto Generate (located at the bottom of the dialog box in the PINCredential section). 3. A dialog box appears so that you can see the PIN the system generated. Give this PIN information to the person who will use the PIN, then click OK. 4. If the PIN generated is not appropriate, you can click Auto Generate again to generate a new unique PIN. 5. To save the Credentials settings, click Save and Close. Removing an Access Card To Remove an Access Card 1. From the Credentials tab of the Personnel Editor, click on the Credential in the list of Credentials that you wish to remove. 2. Click Remove to remove the Credential. 3. To save the Credentials settings, click Save and Close. 62 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle EFTA01226875 Personnel Credentials Tab Validating a CHUID When a Personnel record is saved, the CHUID for each credential in the Personnel record is checked to make sure that it is unique in the system. A card access credential must be unique among all card access credentials, and a PIN-Only access credential must be unique among all PIN-Only access credentials. If any of the credentials is not unique when you attempt to save a Personnel record, an error message appears identifying which credential is not unique. You can then adjust one or more of the CHUID fields to make the credential CHUID unique. You can also check the uniqueness of any credential by selecting a credential on the Credentials tab and clicking Validate CHUID Uniqueness. Example: If you have received an error message that a credential is not unique, you can change the value of a CHUID field and click Validate CHUID Uniqueness to test whether or not the value is now unique. To Validate CHUID Uniqueness 1. From the Credentials tab of the Personnel Editor, click the Credential in the list of Credentials that you wish to validate. 2. Click Validate CHUID Uniqueness to test whether the CHUID for the selected credential is unique. 3. If the CHUID is not unique, an error message appears stating that the CHUID is not unique, and displaying the CHUID value. 4. If the CHUID is unique, a message appears showing the CHUID and stating that the CHUID is valid. 5. To save the Credentials settings, click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 83 EFTA01226876 Personnel Clearances Tab Personnel Clearances Tab The Personnel Clearances Tab lets you assign access privileges (Clearances) to a person. A Clearance specifies the Doors or Door Groups and Elevators or Elevator Groups that a person can access, and the scheduled times that access can occur. You can also set the Clearance Filter level for this person. See Personnel Clearances Tab Definitions on Page 64 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Clearances tab. Figure 11 on Page 64 shows the Personnel Clearances tab. See Clearances Tab Tasks on Page 65 for the tasks you can perform from the Clearances tab. NOTE The Clearance Partition column is visible only if the system is Partitioned. Figure 11: Personnel Clearances Tab r.ror edOca Clio* ee.w, Gaol p.d.fy Owns I Gun«. Ersordall wept, I Bran' CuaanCusincs I Rea Coo. IPasIrnel Pops I °tercet — 0•16.0C• NOW Daman. grr uwwe a ct Loll Personnel Clearances Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Clearances tab are shown in Table 7 on Page 64. Table 7: Personnel Clearances Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Clearance Id Displays the system-generated ID of the Clearance. Clearance Name Displays the name of the Clearance. 64 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226877 Personnel Clearances Tab Personnel Clearances Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Clearance Partrlion Displays the name of the Partition the Clearance resides in. This column is visible only on a Partitioned system. Description Displays the description of the Clearance entered by the Operator when the Clearance was last edited. Add Clid< this button to add a new dearance. You can select one or more Clearances from the Clearance Select dialog box that appears, and dick OK to add them to the Personnel record. You can use CT RL+Left did< and SHIFT+Left-ack to select multiple Clearances The number of clearances allowed per person is defined in Options & Too Is>System Variables. Rom-, Clid< this button to remove the selected dearance(s). A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the removal. Click Yea and the selected aedentials are removed. Clearance FRO, Level You can select a Clearance Filter Level for this person from the drop-down list. The avalable Clearance Filter Levels are numbered 1 through 6. Level 1 is the lowest level and is the default level for both Personnel and Readers. Level6 is the highest level. You can use the Levels to restrict access by activating an Event that raises the Clearance Fite( Level of one or more Readers. Personnel with a lower Clearance Filer Level than the reader are denied access. Clearances Tab Tasks You can perform the following tasks from the Clearances tab: ■ Adding a Clearance on Page 65. ■ Removing a Clearance on Page 66. ■ Setting a Clearance Filter Level on Page 66. Adding a Clearance You can add a Clearance to a Personnel record to specify the access rights for this person. NOTE The maximum number of Clearances that you can assign to a Personnel record is set by the System Variable Maximum Clearances Per Person in System Variables for Personnel. The default value is 10. For information about System Variables see the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. To Add a Clearance 1. From the Clearances tab of the Personnel Editor, click Add. A Clearance selection control dialog box appears. 2. Select one or more clearances from the list of clearances in the dialog box. You can select multiple clearances by using CTRL+Left-click, or you can select a range of clearances by clicking the first row in the range, then using SHIFf+Left-click to select the last row in the range. 3. Click OK to accept the selections you have made, or click Cancel to discard your selections. 4. The Clearances you selected are added to the table listing clearances for this person. 5. To save the Clearances settings, click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 65 EFTA01226878 PersonnelClearancesTab Removing a Clearance To Remove a Clearance 1. From the Clearances tab of the Personnel Editor, click the row in the Clearances table that you wish to remove. To select a row, click on the row selector. The row is highlighted, and the row selector changes to ► 2. Click Remove. A dialog box opens for you to confirm the deletions. 3. Click Yes to delete the Clearance, or No to cancel the deletion. 4. To save the Clearances settings, click Save and Close. Setting a Clearance Filter Level You can set a Clearance Filter Level for a person that determines whether or not the person can gain access at specific iSTAR Readers. A person must have a greater or equal Clearance Filter Level than the Reader for access to be granted. The default Clearance Filter level for Personnel is 1. When an Event or condition changes the Clearance Filter level of readers on this C•CURE 9000 Server, the new Personnel Clearance Filter Level is applied to any Personnel who swipe a credential at those readers, and Personnel with a lower Clearance Filter Level than the reader are denied access. Personnel with equal or greater Clearance Filter Level are granted or denied access based on their Clearance. Example: You set up an Event that activated during a security lockdown by setting the Clearance Filter Level for a group of iSTAR readers to Level 4. Any Personnel who have a Clearance Filter setting lower than Level 4 who attempt to access those readers are denied access. To Set a Clearance Filter Level 1. Open the Personnel editor. (See Accessing the Personnel Editor on Page 38.) 2. Navigate to the Clearances tab. 3. Click is in the Clearance Filter Level field to select a Clearance Filter Level from the drop-down list. 4. Click Save and Close to save your changes to the Personnel record. 66 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226879 Personnel Customer Tab Personnel Customer Tab The Personnel Customer Tab (shown in Figure 12 on Page 67) displays 22 Customer fields that can be renamed on the Customer tab. These fields are not used directly by C•CURE 9000, but are reserved for customer use. These fields can be used in any way a user wishes. They can also can be included on badges designed using the C•CURE ID Badge Designer. See Personnel Customer Tab Definitions on Page 68 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Customer Tab. • You can rename these fields using the Options and Tools Customer Field Labels editor. You can make these changes only if you have the appropriate Operator Privilege for Customer Field Labels. See the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for more information. • You can move, resize, and even remove these fields using the Personnel Views editor. You can make these changes only if you have the appropriate Operator Privilege for Personnel Views. See Personnel Views Editor on Page 182 for more information. Figure 12: Customer Tab IT- • av••... at...edam g ea x.. riling Calm. :ewe 14/.--reetarkt. • Caoll CROSS I Novae Cuba 'Cuss (ASS I boll.] San' OatanCliairce I Ponca Pen I Pawn, hem I Ostyak. Ted T.4 tedi T4 Tee tedf Tg4 INV Ion teCit•Oitt 9/1 la fre r Lox.' r facie zl To Access the Personnel Customer Field Editor 1. In the navigation pane, click the Options & Tools button and select Customer Held Labels. The Customer Field Label editor opens. 2. In the Database Held Name column, scroll to the field whose label you want to edit. The default field labels correspond to the fields on the Personnel Customer tab. 3. In the Label column, type in the new field label. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle Chapter 2 87 EFTA01226880 Personnel Customer Tab 4. Scroll down and modify any of the other text, integer, numeric value, logical, or date fields, as needed. Enter the new label in the Label column. 5. Click Save and Close to save the changes. Personnel Customer Tab Definitions The following fields and buttons shown in Table 8 on Page 68 are available on the Customer tab. Table 8: Personnel Customer Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Teti- Teti 1 These fields are intended for personnel information such asdepartment, address, city, and state. You can change the field labels using the Customer Field Label editor. The Text fields on this tab (Textl - Text12) have a Maximum Length of 150 characters. Text12 (Unique) This field is required to have a unique text value for every record in the database. If two or more records have an identical value for Text12, an error message is displayed. You can change the field label using the Customer Field Label editor. If you migrate Personneldata from C•CURE 800/8000, unique text contained in Text6 on C•CURE 800/8000 is mapped to Text12 on C•CURE 9000. Intl - Int5 These fields are intended for numeric personnel information such as depa rtment number, salary, and age. You can change the field label using the Customer Field Label editor. The integer fields (int - Int6) have a minimum value of 0 and a maximum value of 9223372036854775807. Int6 (Unique) This field is required to have a unique numeric value for every record in the database. If two or more records have an identical value for Int6, an error message is displayed. You can change the field label using theCustomer Field Label editor. Logicall - Logical2 Log ical3 and Logical4 are boolean fields. You can use these fields for Yes/No value information such as whether a person is a full-time employee. You can change the field Labels using the Customer Field Label editor. Click the check box to signify Yes or clear the check box to signify No. Datel - Date2 Datel and Date2 are Date-formatted fields.You can use these two date fields to specify personnel information such as a starting date or a promotion date. You can change the field labels using theCustomer Field Label editor. You can pick a value for these fields by choking the down-arrow to open a Calendar control and choosing a date. 68 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Con figuration Guide EFTA01226881 Personnel Customer Extended Tab Personnel Customer Extended Tab The Personnel Customer Extended Tab (shown in Figure 13 on Page 69) displays 20 Customer fields that can be renamed on the Customer Extended tab. These fields are not used directly by C•CURE 9000, but are reserved for customer use. They can also can be included on badges designed using the C•CURE ID Badge Designer. See Personnel Customer Extended Tab Definitions on Page 69 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Customer Extended Tab. ■ You can rename these fields using the Options and Tools Customer Field Labels editor. You can make these changes only if you have the appropriate Operator Privilege for Customer Field Labels. See the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for more information. ■ You can move, resize, and even remove these fields using the Personnel Views editor. You can make these changes only if you have the appropriate Operator Privilege for Personnel Views. See Personnel Views Editor on Page 182 for more information. Figure 13: Customer Extended Tab kdA•erdclia r ot< onto,- 6.04011Chow"' tr.. Cie" 14.**/ hvgv. I teb•I DMA Mow GatIli..• I Porafstbst I Pvecotortnin I NZ p to Personnel Customer Extended Tab Definitions The following fields and buttons shown in Table 9 on Page 69 are available on the Customer Extended tab. Table 9: Pe rson ne I C ustome r Extended Tab Definitions FieldlButton Description Text13 (Unique) This field is required to have a unique textvalue for every record in the database. If hvo or more records have an denticalvalue for Text13, an error message is displayed. You can change the field label using the Customer Field Label editor. If you migrate Personneldata from C•CURE 800/8000. unique text contained in Text? on C•CURE 800/8000 is mapped to Text13 on C•CURE 9000. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 1 69 EFTA01226882 Personnel Customer Extended Tab Person nel C ustomer Extended Tab Definitions(continued) Field/Button Description Text14 - Text25 These fields are intended for personnel information such as department. address. city. and state. You can change the field labels using the Customer Field Label editor. The Text fieidson this tab (Text13 - Text25) have a Maximum Length of 150 characters. Intl - Int9 These fields are intended for numeric personnel information such asdepartment number, salary, and age. You can change the field label using the Customer Field Label ed Ito rn. The Integer fields (Int] - int9) have a minimum value of 0 and a maximum value of 9223372036854775807. Logical3 - Logical4 Log Ica l3 and Logical4 are boolean fields.You can use these fields for Yes/No value information such as whether a person is a full-time employee. You can change the field labels using the Customer Field Label editor. Click the check box to signify Yes or clear the check box to signify No. Date3 - Date4 Date3 and Date4 are Date-formatted fields. You can use these two date fields to specify personnel information such as a starting date or a promotion date. You can change the field labels using the Customer Field Label editor. You can pick a value for these fields by choking the down-arrow to open a Calendar control and choosing a date. 70 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Con figuration Guide EFTA01226883 Personnel Images Tab Personnel Images Tab The Personnel Images tab lets you include badge portraits and captured signatures in the Personnel record. These images are stored in the C•CURE 9000 database. See Personnel Images Tab Definitions on Page 71 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Images tab. Figure 14 on Page 71 shows an example of the Personnel Images tab. See Images Tab Tasks on Page 72 for tasks you can perform from the Images tab. Figure 14: Personnel Images Tab y.v. dee Cbbe St. Ed 141.. Gni.« Cieret‘escn,s0sve. Gad 1 CMS& I n••ml timbal CalesEdnbl SON )reel P.0...lPandbr I Cian/Vir•Pabie ?Of F.D.., Cain kraus rekek.se Sgratentis. Personnel Images Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Images tab are shown in Table 10 on Page 71. Table 10: Personnel Images Tab Definitions Field/Button ....m. Description Portrait Name Type in a name for the image that you will captu re, or accept the defautt name the system assigns. Capture Click this button to capture a new portrait image (if an image has not yet been captured), or replace an existing image. Capture I Import (Appears only d you chose Enable both device capture and import from fie during C•CURE ID Portrait Configuration.] • Click the left side of this button to Capture an Image from a capture device. • Click the right side of this button to Import an Image from a fie. Capture Date Displays the capture date and time for each Portrait image. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapfur 2 71 EFTA01226884 Personnel Images Tab Personnel Images Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Primary Image Identify one of the captured images as the primary image for this personnel record. You can dick in this field to change the primary image. Capture Signature Click this button to capture a signature image for this personnel record. Depending on your Badge setup settings, a dialog box opens toaiow you to capture a signature from a capture device, or to import an image fie from disk. If a signature capture image already exists in this personnel record, using Capture Signature overwrites that image. Remove Signature Click this button to remove a captured signature image from this personnel record. The signature image is removed immediately when you did( this button. Signature Capture Date Displays the date that the current captured signature was added to this personnel record. Add Click this button to add a new image. Then click the Capture button to choose an image. • If you have specified Import from file in Options 8 Tools>Badge Setup, you can selectan image fie from the avaiable drives in the Import Image dialog box that appears. • If you have specified TWAIN as the capture device in Options 8. Tools>Badge Setup, a dialog box appears to let you select a TWAIN device for the image capture. Remove Select a row in the Images table by clicking the row selector 0 , then click Remove to delete the selected image(s). A cl 'a icy box appears asking you to confirm the removal. Click Yes and the selected images are removed. Images Tab Tasks You can perform the following tasks from the Personnel Images tab. ■ Adding an Image to a Personnel Record on Page 72 ■ Removing an Image from a Personnel Record on Page 75 ■ Adding a Signature to a Personnel Record on Page 75 ■ Removing a Signature from a Personnel Record on Page 75 Adding an Image to a Personnel Record You use the Capture button to add an image to a Personnel Record. The Capture button is configured during Badge Setup to either allow you to import a file or to capture a photo image via a camera. See the C•CURE 9000 C•CURE ID User Guide for more information on Badge Setup and on capturing images. NOTE During Badge Setup, you can choose to display a combined Capture and Import button on the Personnel Imaging tab. If you select this option, the button appears as Capture I Importe. ■ If you click the left side of the button, you can Capture an Image. ■ If you click the right side of the button, you can Import an Image. ■ If your system is set up to import an image from disk, see To Import an Image into a Personnel Record on Page 73. 72 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226885 Personnel Images Tab ■ If your system is set up to Capture an image from a camera, see To Capture an Image with a Camera and Add it to a Personnel Record on Page 74. To Import an Image into a Personnel Record 1. From the Images tab of the Personnel Editor, click Add. A new row appears in the Capture/View Portraits table. 2. Click Capture (or the Import side of the Capture I Import button) in the new row. The Import Image dialog box shown in Figure 15 on Page 73 appears. Figure 15: Import Image Dialog Box Preview of Image Image Stanton • Image Info Selected 61.: • A: • J C: • -J D: • -3 Y: • J Z: Load Image : width : StigM : Type - orism•dom ✓ o dares ✓ 90 S 19/**5 ✓ 160 degrees ✓ 210 degrees cancel 3. Click the Image Selection tree to navigate to the file you want to import. 4. Click the image file in the free that you want to import; a preview of the image file appears. 5. Click one of the Orientation options to rotate the image, if desired. 6. Click Load Image. The Save Image dialog box (Figure 17 on Page 74) appears. 7. Use the cropping selection box to select the portion of the image to import, if you wish. 8. Resize the cropping selection box by clicking and dragging any of the box's corners, if you wish. 9. Click Save to save the image. The image appears in the Image area on the Images tab, and the system assigns a Portrait Name and Capture Date. 10. Modify the system-assigned Portrait Name by editing that field in the Table, if you wish. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 73 EFTA01226886 Personnel Images Tab 11. If you want this image to be the Primary Image (that displays on Dynamic Views and at the Monitoring Station) for this person, select El in the Primary Image field. 12. Click Add to save the imported image. To Capture an Image with a Camera and Add it to a Personnel Record 1. From the Images tab of the Personnel Editor, click Add. A new row appears in the Capture/View Portraits table. 2. Click Capture (or the Capture side of the Capture j Import button) in the new row. The Video Capture dialog box, shown in Figure 16 on Page 74, opens to let you freeze and save a picture. Figure 16: Video Capture Dialog .11!!!! IMO I I cot.. I cr. 3. Frame your subject in the Video Capture dialog box by moving the camera or by using the cursor. 4. Make any adjustments using the controls on the dialog box, and click Accept to capture the image. The Save Image dialog box (see Figure 17 on Page 74) opens so that you can make adjustments to the captured image. Figure 17: Save Image Dialog Box trag*/*//aMda 0081/1a On% 08 Covora0.8.810 .800 Co.88.8.801•800 00 Gino* 5. Use the mouse (click and drag) to move the cropping selection box (dotted line rectangle) with the mouse pointer to select the portion of the image to import as a portrait, if you wish. You can this box anywhere on the captured image. 6. Use the cropping Selection box sizing handles to change the dimensions of the image as required, if you wish. 74 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226887 Personnel Images Tab 7. Use the brightness and contrast controls to change the appearance of the image. Other camera features may be available, such as Backlighting, Zoom In/Out, or Rash On/Off. These controls are described in the C•CURE 90000 C•CURE ID User Guide. 8. When you have selected the portion of the image you want to save, and you have performed all adjustments, click Save to save the image. The image appears in the Image area on the Images tab, and the system assigns a Portrait Name and Capture Date. 9. Modify the system-assigned Portrait Name by editing that field in the Table, if you wish. 10. If you want this image to be the Primary Image (that displays on Dynamic Views and at the Monitoring Station) for this person, select El in the Primary Image field. 11. Click Save and Close to save the image. Removing an Image from a Personnel Record To Remove an Image from a Personnel Record 1. From the Images tab of the Personnel Editor, click the row selector ► I for the image you wish to delete. 2. Click Remove. A confirmation dialog box appears asking you to confirm the deletion. Click Yes to delete the image, or No to cancel the deletion. Adding a Signature to a Personnel Record To Add a Signature to a Personnel Record 1. From the Images tab of the Personnel Editor, click Capture Signature. 2. The Signature Capture dialog box that you configured during Badge Setup (on the Options and Tools pane) appears. • Signature Import: Click the Image Selection tree to navigate to the file you want to import and then click the signature file you want to import • Signature Capture: Follow the signature capture instructions for the signature capture device you are using. 3. Click OK to capture the signature. The Save Image dialog box appears. 4. Use the cropping selection box to select the portion of the signature to import. You can resize the cropping selection box by clicking and dragging any of the box's corners. 5. Click Save to save the signature. The signature appears in the Signature area on the Images tab. 6. Click Save and Close to save the imported signature. Removing a Signature from a Personnel Record When you remove a signature by clicking Remove Signature, the signature is removed immediately. If you change your mind and want to undo the removal of the signature. click CI and when the dialog box appears asking if you want to save changes before exiting, answer No. When you open the Personnel Editor again, the signature is restored. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 75 EFTA01226888 Personnel Images Tab To Remove a Signature from a Personnel Record 1. From the Images tab of the Personnel Editor, click Remove Signature. 2. The signature is immediately removed. 76 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle EFTA01226889 Personnel Badging Tab Personnel Badging Tab The Personnel Badging tab lets you select a portrait image for each badge access credential, enroll a fingerprint for a badge, preview a badge prior to printing, and print a badge to a badge printer. See Personnel Badging Tab Definitions on Page 77 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Badging Tab. Figure 18 on Page 77 shows the Personnel Badging tab. F Ig u re 18: Personnel Badging Tab SeleO CiteMite %Or Pit I FRS ilipinthllO0011011•1 NMI __.el 1 1 hew r.,. los LAttignlitLfAntote IlmIltalmore tan. ••••• 1 Emalammi Ss Cana, Loam Catm Irmtki-vo- :meet /errs Personnel Badging Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Badging tab are shown in Table 11 on Page 77. Table 11: Personnel Badging Tab Definitions FlekUBuftons Description Credential Id The system-assigned ID number for this credential, from the Personnel Credentials tab. Card # The card number for the selected credential, from the Personnel Credentials tab. Badge Layout Displays the Badge Layout selected for this credential on the Personnel Credentials tab. Badge Layoutsare created using the C•CURE ID Badge Designer. Badge Print Date Displays the last date that the credential (badge) was printed. Select Badge Portrait This drop-down list lets you select a badge portrait from the badge portraits stored in the Personnel database. This portrait is used for previewing and printing the currently selected credential. You can add portraits to the personnel record using the Personnel Badging tab. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 77 EFTA01226890 Personnel Badging Tab Personnel Badging Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Buttons Description Print Badge Click this button to print the selected badge. Depending on your Badge Setup Printer Settings. the badge either prints a utomaticalty or is added to the Batch Print Queue. If the badge isqueued, the C•CURE ID Batch Print Manager dialog box opens to allow you to manage the print queue. From this dialog box you can choose to print this badge and any other badges currently in thequeue. Preview Badge Click this button to view a print preview of the person's badge. A C•CURE ID Print Preview dialog boxopens to display the badge. Click to close the preview dialog box. Enroll Finger Print Click this button to enroll fingerprints onto cards via a Bioscrypt reader. The Fingerprint Capture dialog box appears. and prompts guide you through the enrollment process. Enrollment Date A read-only field that displays the Date/Time that a fingerprint was enrolled for the selected credential. EnrolVProgram Smart Card Click this button to enroll or program smart cards via a Smart Card encoder. Depending upon the °Dag uration settings for the encoder, your Smart Card is enrolled/programmed or added to the Batch Print Manager queue. Enrollment Date A read-on ty field that displays the Date/Time that a Smart Card was enrolled and/or programmed for the selected credential. Badging Tab Tasks ■ Selecting a Badge Portrait on Page 78 ■ Enrolling a Fingerprint on Page 78 ■ Previewing a Badge on Page 79 ■ Printing a Badge on Page 80 Selecting a Badge Portrait For each badge credential you created on the Personnel Credentials tab, you can select a badge portrait from those you imported on the Personnel Images tab. To Select a Badge Portrait 1. From the Personnel Badging tab, select a credential from the Select Credential for Badge table. 2. Use the drop-down list in the Select Badge Portrait field to select a portrait for the credential. (If the drop-down list is empty, you must add an image to the Personnel record using the Personnel Imaging tab.) 3. Click Preview Badge to see a preview of the badge credential with the portrait in place, or click Print Badge to print this badge credential. Enrolling a Fingerprint If you have used Badge Setup to configure fingerprint capture, you can use the Enroll Finger Print button to perform fingerprint enrollment for badge credentials. If you have not enabled fingerprint capture in Badge Setup, the Enroll Finger Print button is unavailable. 78 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226891 Personnel Badging Tab MM, To Enroll a Fingerprint 1. From the Personnel Badging tab, select a credential from the Select Credential for Badge table. 2. Click Enroll Finger Print. The Fingerprint Capture dialog box (Figure 19 on Page 79) appears. Figure 19: Fingerprint Capture °lab° Box a Tie Rasta I On Cam ale Lianas t.e. bar4 Fees :we Seta OKOslix toCte Art , Amt.. Sellef0NOWno kyry- tte ir,•••• Sop,. a Avne Las alii.Vatatay Gel hallar• en.S•lisist e•t9I, bid 5nm Pit fivelleathe S.- 1•••••064••• Ian* inPlead IP.ienete C Owelmort <NON COtall I c-d Platte ClEed Minter dnenel• taws': =MEM meow% Cenr. Pin TIVS mJt to Wit time. Rose ...to 100,0600. So-RS.2 Noe. tosoliple ID =end Tenpin. • 3. Capture one or more fingerprints using the Capture button. For more information on using this dialog box, click Fl to view the C•CURE ID Help. Previewing a Badge You can view a preview of a badge credential to determine if it looks correct before you print it. To Preview a Badge 1. From the Personnel Badging tab, select a credential from the Select Credential for Badge table. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 79 EFTA01226892 Personnel Badging Tab 2. Click Preview Badge. The C•CURE ID Print Preview dialog box (Figure 20 on Page 80) appears, showing you a full-size preview of the badge. Figure 20: Preview Badge Dialog Box C CURE ID Print Preview SOW 51. elva hy I'll" III 3. Click MI to close the preview dialog box. Printing a Badge You can send a badge credential to the printer you configured during Badge Setup. NOTE If any data in the personnel record has been changed but not yet saved, you must save the changes before the badge can be printed. This feature is intended to prevent the printing of a badge with data that has not been audited To Print a Badge 1. From the Personnel Badging tab, select a credential from the Select Credential for Badge table. 2. Click Print Badge. Depending on the Printing and Print Queue options configured using Badge Setup, the badge is either sent to the printer, or added to the C•CURE ID Print Queue. In the latter case, the C•CURE ID Print Queue Manager dialog box appears for you to decide how and when to print the badge. Enrolling/Programming a Smart Card If you have set up a badge printer or Smart Card encoder device using C•CURE ID Badge Setup>SmartCard settings, you can use the Enroll/Prog. Smart Card button to program MIFARE Smart Cards. Refer to the C•CURE 9000 C•CURE ID for instructions for configuring and performing Smart Card programming and enrolling. 80 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226893 Personnel Previous Doors Tab Personnel Previous Doors Tab The Personnel Previous Doors tab allows users to display a Journal replay of the accesses and rejects for a person. The replay starts with the most recent accesses first, and goes back as far as the journal is configured to store. (The Journal System Variable setting for Number Of Days To Store determines how many days of journal activity are stored. For information about System Variables see the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide". The list displays as a Dynamic View that you can sort, filter, group, and print. Figure 21 on Page 81 shows the Personnel Previous Doors tab. Figure 21: Personnel Previous Doors Tab 9 Pes tonne! lIttswau. Jesus d Sr...m(1m tains. and Nay aal Sea Cams Von Dial. Pommel ea %ear Gated I Oudylids I Oran l a I Dr s Sleds/ I .9899 HMIS llasSlangsj 'we* Man lea= ....a um LB..... 911 Rik "Ina Coast: IIi sas ear,: la er0, esa man JciadLaslaspospa bps Ku* Dale Tiro SowDalap Tina CeI IsIssosol Nonyabassethe 11.20361 Mendip. Dame. 11.2091 "Warf rad Vaal'101111 God lisamiad MtedicOaastass n1.20161 Morel. Daub 11.20) lisaaceadilDwitikl HaasnaJeavetad IowanINI - Note. °tante II. 2D:61 Ileap.Deasobs 11. X0 RocasSIDtsalecl &Fes. Jssos' K. 1018597210 stkol'OUTI Mcs."Otantes II. MI I Hand. Dusts 11. ZO Roxelal(Cssataal hp~iveµ *sera Cad 1=11 ° Horclos.094900.11.20$1 alosileir.Denistsw Acbosed *eine. Aare RN ICA1699:1 fl oor' 101.191 -I Slassist Csoonts 11.20)61 lasscsay.Dataw11.200 Adrahonewira Jade rad 1644,987:1 brow 1' INS [Ur.** Cod %Mid Cs Redid CSAMMd CadAtbisd I CmoilaPine•Oan I I usip.o. See Personnel Previous Doors Definitions on Page 81 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Previous Doors Tab. Personnel Previous Doors Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Previous Doors tab are explained below. Previous Doors List This list displays previous access attempts by this person for the journal storage period (the setting for the Personnel System Variable Maximum Days in Journal). The list shows the Message Type, Message Date and Time, the Server Date and Time, and the text of the message. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 81 EFTA01226894 Personnel Previous Doors Tab Complete Previous Doors Click this button to display all of the latest access messages, up to the number of days specified in the Personnel System Variable Maximum Days in Journal). Limited Previous Doors Click this button to display a specified number of access messages. This number is set in the Previous Doors Replay Number in System Variables. The default value is three messages. Previous Doors Tab Tasks ■ Viewing a Complete Previous Doors List on Page 82 ■ Viewing a Limited Previous Doors List on Page 82 Viewing a Complete Previous Doors List This view shows all the latest access messages in the journal for the number of days specified in the Personnel System Variable Maximum Days in Journal. To View a Complete Previous Doors List 1. From the Previous Doors tab, click Complete Previous Doors. 2. A Dynamic View appears, listing all of the latest access messages in the Journal for this person. Viewing a Limited Previous Doors List This view shows the most recent access messages, up to the number set in the Previous Doors Replay Number in System Variables. (The default value is three messages.) To View a Limited Previous Doors List 1. From the Previous Doors tab, click Limited Previous Doors. 2. A Dynamic View appears, listing the most recent access messages up to the number set in the Previous Doors Replay Number in System Variables. 82 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226895 Personnel User-defined Flelds Tab Personnel User-defined Fields Tab When a C•CURE 9000 Administrator creates a new Personnel View, a new tab is added to the Personnel View. This tab is called User-defined Fields, and it lists by default all of the User-defined Fields that existed at the time the View was created. Figure 22 on Page 83 shows an example of a User-defined Fields tab with a few User-defined fields. Figure 22: Example User-defined Fields Tab %we aro 0.-A l:Si tmnd a Son Cominiest Oscura. Sean/ Kw. Gomtsi Coln* Cb0wcalOaloss Oars Lead 0.000e Dom Urn**, Nix pawed) r-rodiss. Las Tog Scellanto • Re0ststa Des IV MO II d Senn/ le.. 0 Leal Ste 0 Alivre•La (*saw°. 8, 24010 croka its* 0:0 4 di a The appearance of this tab (and others in the View) may differ from this example if the Administrator performs subsequent editing of the Personnel View. An Administrator can move fields, add additional fields, hide existing fields, rename or remove the User-defined Fields tab, or create an entirely new tab for the User-defined fields. For more information about User-defined Fields, see the chapter on User-defined Fields in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 83 EFTA01226896 Personnel Custom Clearance Tab Personnel Custom Clearance Tab The Personnel Custom Clearance Tab lets you assign Custom Clearances to a person. 'Custom' Clearances differ from regular 'Common' Clearances because they allow you to associate individual Clearance Items with a specific person. This lets you give access to/exclusion from Doors/Door Groups and Elevators/Elevator Groups uniquely per person. You can assign only one Clearance Item (either a Door/Door Group or an Elevator/Elevator Group) to a Custom Clearance; but you can assign multiple Custom Clearances to individual Personnel. NOTE Custom Clearances are supported only on the iSTAR controller and apC Panels. The Personnel Custom Clearance Tab itself has two tabs: ■ Doors ■ Elevators See Personnel Custom Clearance Tab Definitions on Page 85 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Custom Clearance tab. Figure 23 on Page 85 shows the Personnel Custom Clearance tab with the Doors tab displayed. Figure 24 on Page 85 shows the Personnel Custom Clearance tab with the Elevators tab displayed. Custom Clearances in an Enterprise Environment in an Enterprise Environment, although Custom Clearances relate to Doors/Elevators that are specific to a particular SAS, assigning Custom Clearances works as follows: ■ Custom Clearances assigned to a Global Personnel record are always global. ■ Custom Clearances assigned to a Local Personnel record are always local. If the MAS is offline, you can add the same Custom Clearance at both the MAS and SAS. Once the MAS is back online, only one Custom Clearance should remain in the database. 84 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226897 Personnel Custom Clearance Tab Figure 23: Personnel Custom Clearance Tab- Doors Tab Wm old *a ki ion anf irker Wm* 4. tea 'A.. &eg ceased ammo, cisme wimp eripidell mem I were aem Nen. I Pe.WIDX., I P<*g(rd "OW" I CLOnCleora ,661... Ow. Innen' McGee Desks. Dx.Sthwe Us t Ad•ounce, lkt.eby. UstEporelob Eptlfa Figure 24: PersonnelCustom Clearance Tab - Elevators Tab rnmersi - Rota d tan a+:':4 I . SW. 4n:Pft sre °nen{ %Jew Net Re-al fee a.. Gebel I Cott** OrnmurCet l CuSse l Ckned owed I ince. I 801" O.'"'°•••"' I NW". C'X', I wane 1.00c., —CusicinClenice Dom I Ckwan I Personnel Custom Clearance Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Custom Clearance tab are shown in Table 12 on Page 86. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 85 EFTA01226898 Personnel Custom Clearance Tab Table 12: Personnel Custom Clearance Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Custom Clearance Add Click this button to associate a new Door/Door Group or Elevator/Elevator Group Custom Clearance item with this person. Remove Click this button to remove the selected Door/Door Group or Elevator/Elevator Group Custom Clearance item from this person. Doors Tab Door Group Click the check box to limit the objects in the selection dialog box that opens in the Door Name field to Door Groupsonty. (If this check box is unselected. the selection list includes single Doors on ty.) Door Name Click in this field, and then dick El to open a selection dialog box listing the available Doors, or Door Groups (depending on whether or not Door Group was selected in the first field). Select a Door or Door Group to add that object to the Custom Clearance. Schedule Click in this field, and then dick El to open a selection dialog box listing the available Schedules. Select a Schedule to add that Schedule to the Custom Clearance. Use Activation Click to select this check box to enable the date/time in the Activation field and set the date on which this Custom Clearance becomes act lye. (The Custom Clearance does not allow access before the date you set.) Activation Click in this field to display a calendar icon with a down-arrow 171/08./2012 14 22 0 , and then dick the down-arrow to pick the date on which this Custom Clearance becomes active. (You can alsoenter the date/time manually.) Use Expiration Click to select thischeck box to enable the date/time in the Expiration field and set the date on which this Custom Clearance becomes Inactive. (The Custom Clearance does not allow access after the date you set.) Expiration Click in this field to display a calendar icon with a down-arrow F-10812012 14 22 Efr , and then dick the down-arrow to pick the date on which this Custom Clearance becomes Inactive. (You can also enter the date/time manually.) Elevators Tab Elevator Group Click the check box to limit the objects in the selection dialog box that opens in the Elevator Name field to Elevator Groups only. (If thischeck box is unselected, the selection list includessingle Elevatorsonty.) Elevator Name Click in this field, and then click 0 to open a selection dialog box listing the available Elevators, or Elevator Groups (depending on whether or not Elevator Group was selected in the first field). Select an Elevator or Elevator Group to add that object to the Custom Clearance. Floor Group Click the check box to limit the objects in the selection dialog box that opens in the Floor Name field to Floor Grou ps on ty. (If this check box is unselected. the selection list includes single F leers only.) Floor Name Click in this field, and then dick El to open a selection dialog box listing the avalable Floors, or Floor Groups (depending on whether or not Floor Group was selected in the first field). Select a Floor or Floor Group to add that object to the Custom Clearance. Elevator Schedule Click in this field, and then dick El to open a selection dialog box listing the available Schedules. Select a Schedule to add that Schedule to the Custom Clearance. Use Activation Click to select this check box to enable the date/time in the Activation field and set the date on which this Custom Clearance becomes active. (The Custom Clearance does not allow access before the date you set.) 86 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226899 Personnel Custom Clearance Tab Personnel Custom Clearance Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Activation Choi( in this field to display a calendar icon with a down-arrow 111°V2°12 14 22 U , and then click the down-arrow to pid< the date on which this Custom Clearance becomes active. (You can also enter the datettime manually.) Use Expiration add° select this died( box to enable the date/time in the Expiration field and set the date on which this Custom Clearance becomes Inactive. (The Custom Clearance does not allow access after the date you set.) Expiration Click in this field to display a calendar icon with a down-arrow TV0V2012 " 22 O-, and then dick the down-arrow to pek the date on which this Custom Clearance becomes Inactive. (You can also enter the date/time manually.) Custom Clearance Tab Tasks You can perform the following tasks from the Custom Clearance tab: ■ Adding a Custom Clearance to Access Doors/Door Groups on Page 87. ■ Removing a Custom Clearance for Doors/Door Groups on Page 88. ■ Adding a Custom Clearance to Access Elevators/Elevator Groups on Page 89. ■ Removing a Custom Clearance for Elevators/Elevator Groups on Page 90. In addition, you can have expired Custom Clearances removed from a person's record by creating an Event with a Remove Expired Custom Clearance from Personnel Action. For information, see Removing an Expired Custom Clearance from a Personnel Record on Page 153 NOTE Whether or not you can assign Custom Clearances to a Personnel record, as well as the maximum number of Custom Clearances allowed, is set by the System Variable Maximum Custom Clearances Per Person in System Variables for Personnel. (The default value for this variable is 0 [zero), meaning that no Custom Clearances can be assigned to any Personnel record.) If the Maximum Custom Clearances Per Person variable is set to zero, when you click Add on either the Custom Clearances Doors or Elevators tab, the following warning message appears: To enable Custom Clearances the "Maximum number of Custom Clearances per person" item in the Personnel entry of the System Variables must be greater than 0. For information about editing this System Variable, see the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. Adding a Custom Clearance to Access Doors/Door Groups NOTE In an Enterprise Environment if the MAS is offline, you can add the same Custom Clearance at both the MAS and SAS. Once the MAS is back online, only one Custom Clearance should remain in the database. To Add Custom Clearances to Access Doors/Door Groups 1. From the Custom Clearance tab of the Personnel Editor with the Doors tab showing, click Add to create a new row, as shown in the following figure. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 87 EFTA01226900 Personnel Custom Clearance Tab OS O.na Add— !!•• Remove Doom1 ie —vs—Clees Dar Goy Door NOM Door knee* C I WI' ?meson Oyeason Use Eyesce Eyrasce • 02/14/20131690 • W/14/2013 16 10 2. Click in the Door Name field to display ri and click this button. A selection list opens with the available Doors or Door Groups. 3. Click a to display Door objects, it to display Door Groups, or both to display both Doors and Door Groups. 4. Click the Door or Door Group you want to add to the Clearance. The selection list dialog box closes and the selection is added to the row. If you added a Group, the Door Group column in the table is selected 2 (when you click in any field). 5. Click in the Door Schedule field to display E and click this button. A selection list opens with the available Schedules. 6. Click a Schedule to add it to the row. 7. If you wish to set an optional date/time in the future when this Custom Clearance will become active and/or become inactive, click to select the Use Activation and/or Use Expiration check boxes. The current date/time (in 24-hour clock format) in the Activation and/or Expiration fields becomes available. a. Click in the Activation and/or Expiration fields to display a calendar icon with a down-arrow LE/08/2012 14:22 g and then click the down-arrow to display a calendar. b. Scroll through the calendar to select the date on which you want the Custom Clearance to become active/expire for this person. NOTE You can also click directly in the Activation and/or Expiration fields, without selecting the check box, to display and use the calendar. Once you have selected an Activation/Expiration date, the appropriate Use Activation/Expiration check box is automatically selected. 8. Click Save and Close to accept the selections you have made, adding this Custom Clearance for a Door/Door Group to the Person's record, and closing the record. - Or - Click Save and New to accept the selections you have made, adding this Custom Clearance for a Door/Door Group to the Person's record, and keeping the Personnel Editor open to add more Personnel. - Or - Click Cancel to discard your selections. Removing a Custom Clearance for Doors/Door Groups To Remove a Custom Clearance for Doors/Door Groups 1. From the Custom Clearance tab of the Personnel Editor with the Doors tab showing, click the row selector for the row in the Custom Clearances table that you wish to remove. The row is highlighted, and the row selector changes to 88 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226901 PersonnelCustom Clearance Tab 2. Click Remove. 3. To save the Custom Clearances settings, click Save and C lose Adding a Custom Clearance to Access Elevators/Elevator Groups NOTE In an Enterprise Environment if the MAS is offline, you can add the same Custom Clearance at both the MAS and SAS. Once the MAS is back online, only one Custom Clearance should remain in the database. To Add a Custom Clearance to Access Elevators/Elevator Groups 1. From the Custom Clearance tab of the Personnel Editor, click to display the Elevators tab and then click Add to create a new row, as shown in the following figure. Oaks Clowancs ....Add... ?.Repave 2. Click in the Elevator Name field to display Ej and click this button. A selection list opens with the available Elevators or Elevator Groups. 3. Click to display Elevator objects, to display Elevator Groups, or both to display both Elevators and Elevator Groups. 4. Click the Elevator or Elevator Group you want to add to the Custom Clearance. The selection list dialog box closes and the selection is added to the row. If you added a Group, the Elevator Group column in the table is selected g (when you click in any field). 5. Click in the Floor Name field to display E) and click this button. A selection list opens with the available Floors or Floor Groups. 6. Click G9 to display Floor objects, to display Floor Groups, or both to display both Floors and Floor Groups. 7. Click the Floor or Floor Group you want to add to the Custom Clearance. The selection list dialog box closes and the selection is added to the row. If you added a Group, the Floor Group column in the table is selected g (when you click in any field). 8. Click in the Elevator Schedule field to display in and click this button. A selection list opens with the available Schedules. re) 9. Click a Schedule to add it to the row. 10. If you wish to set an optional date/time in the future when this Custom Clearance will become active and/or become inactive, click to select the Use Activation and/or Use Expiration check boxes. The current date/time (in 24-hour clock format) in the Activation and/or Expiration fields becomes available. a. Click in the Activation and/or Expiration fields to display a calendar icon with a down-arrow ®/08/2012 14:22 @v and then click the down-arrow to display a calendar. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 89 EFTA01226902 Personnel Custom Clearance Tab b. Scroll through the calendar to select the date on which you want the Custom Clearance to become active/expire for this person. NOTE You can also click directly in the Activation and/or Expiration fields, without selecting the check box, to display and use the calendar. Once you have selected an Activation/Expiration date, the appropriate Use Activation/Expiration check box is automatically selected. 11. Click Save and Close to accept the selections you have made, adding this Custom Clearance for an Elevator/Elevator Group to the Person's record, and closing the record. - or - Click Save and New to accept the selections you have made, adding this Custom Clearance for an Elevator/Elevator Group to the Person's record, and keeping the Personnel Editor open to add more Personnel. - or - Click Cancel to discard your selections Removing a Custom Clearance for Elevators/Elevator Groups To Remove a Custom Clearance for Elevators/Elevator Groups 1. From the Custom Clearance tab of the Personnel Editor with the Elevators tab showing, click the row selector for the row in the Custom Clearances table that you wish to remove. The row is highlighted, and the row selector changes to 2. Click Remove. 3. To save the Custom Clearances settings, click Save and Close 90 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226903 Personnel Documents Tab Personnel Documents Tab The Personnel Documents tab allows you to assign a Document object—whether a URL, a PDF, or a TXT file, for example—to a Personnel Record and then to view that Document. The Document can be either a 'Shared' Document that was added to C•CURE 9000 on the Documents Editor, or a 'Private' Document imported from outside the system, such as a birth certificate or a diploma. (The size of the Document file must be smaller than 500K.) The system supports up to two documents per Personnel Record. (The maximum number that can be assigned is set by a Personnel System Variable. For information about System Variables, see the C• CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide.) This Documents tab is not automatically included in the default Personnel View. It is included in the "Personnel View with Portrait in Header" and is automatically added to any new Personnel View that you create. So if you wish to use the Documents tab for any Personnel Records, you must either select the aforementioned View or create a new Personnel View. In order to add Documents to Personnel Records you must have Read Permission for Documents and Add Documents Permission for Personnel. To be able to view these Documents, you must have Read Permission for Documents and View Documents Permission for Personnel. For more information, see the Privileges chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. Figure 25 on Page 91 shows the Personnel Documents tab. Figure 25: Personnel Documents Tab gsnaaos. faimang. lase u..wr to: otr.on ,..... Commit 0,0{4400mm:ell Petro I Wet I Nevi Oe...al Gietl Teal Woos Doe Ilielertedn01 ilnOrtaillPaynaIew ■ For the tasks you can perform from this tab, see the Documents Tab Tasks on Page 93 ■ For definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Documents tab, see Personnel Documents Tab Definitions on Page 92. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 91 EFTA01226904 Personnel Documents Tab Personnel Documents Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Documents tab are shown in Table 13 on Page 92. ■ Shared Documents are Documents added to the C•CURE 9000 system via the Document Editor that can be assigned to more than one Personnel Record or Event Record. For information, see the Document chapter in the &CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. ■ Private Documents are Documents, such as birth certificates, imported from outside C•CURE 9000 that can be attached to only one Personnel Record. The number of Documents allowed per person is defined in System Variables. For information, see the ,CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. Table 13: Personnel DocumentsTab Definitions Field/Button Description Name • For a Shared Document, displays the name of the Document. • For a Private Document, displays the name of the Person whose record this is. Document Origin Displays 'W://f followed by the Document's file name, such as TechStylegd.pdf or Door.gif. Select • Displays Select Document to click and select a Shared Document. • Displays Import File to click to import a Private Document. Document Description Displays the description of the Shared Document entered on the Document Editor. Add Private Document Click this button to add a new row to the Document tab, and then click Import File in the row to add a Private Document. Import File Click this button to open a Windows file dialog box for locating the file you want to add as a Private Document to this Personnel Record. When you click the down-arrow on the Flies of type field, three file types drop down that you can use to fitter your options: • Documents (tpdf; tbct) • Image Files (tbmp: tjpeg: tel(: tpng) • All Files (*.1 Select a file and click Open. (The document can be no larger than 500K or an error message displays.) Add Shared Document Click this button to add a new row to the Document tab, and then clickSelect Document in the row to add a Shared Document. Select Document Click this button to open a selection box with the list of Documents in the system. Click a Document to select it. Remove Select the row of the Document you wish to remove and then click this button. View Document Select the row of the Document you wish to view and then click this button. 92 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226905 Personnel Documents Tab Personnel DocumentsTab Definaions (continued) Field/Button Description Content Area The Document you've selected to view displays in this area if it isa PDF, TXT , XML, or image fie whose viewer is supported by the browser, or a URL. If the Document is another type of Me, such as a DOC or XLS Me, a Fie Download dialog box appears asking "Do you want to open or save this Me? When you dick Open, the Me appears in an external window in its native format. Image fies whose viewer is not supported by the browser—T IF ides, for example—open in whichever Graphics application format you have on your system—such as Paint Shop Proor Paint. (Depending on how the application settings for opening in a browser are set, the DOC, PPT, or XLS Me may open in the Content area.) NOTE: Although the external window has buttons that see m ingty allow you to edit the file and save changes, these changes are not saved in the C•CURE 9000 database. To change a Document, you would have to edit it outside C•CURE 9000 and then re-import it. Documents Tab Tasks You can perform the following tasks from the Documents tab: • Adding a Shared Document to a Personnel Record on Page 93. • Adding a Private Document to a Personnel Record on Page 94. • Removing a Document File from a Personnel Record on Page 94. • Viewing a Document Belonging to a Personnel Record on Page 94. NOTE The maximum number of Documents that you can assign to a Personnel record is set by the System Variable Maximum Documents Per Person in System Variables for Personnel. The default value is 2. If the value of the System Variable is decreased, existing Personnel records with Documents may not be able to add more Documents. The records' existing Documents will remain, but may become unavailable for viewing. For information about System Variables, see the C• CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. You can only add Documents that are smaller than 500K. Adding a Shared Document to a Personnel Record To Add a Shared Document 1. From the Documents tab of the Personnel Editor, click Add Shared Document (If this button is unavailable, it might mean that the maximum number of Documents for this Personnel record are already configured, or that you do not have the requisite permissions.) A new row appears in the table with Select Document in the Select field. Gee* I Oskreah Devica. I 0n.and rnsce BrIn I 0..on Ow we I Gad a/IN...a/. DOMI I lloodindrees Dann I Peowne Inapt I .Jaed Pone Mond N saishaltsonet I '. tan coant r C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 93 EFTA01226906 Personnel DocumentsTab 2. Click Select Document. A Selection box opens with a list of the Documents that have been added to the system on the Documents Editor. 3. Click a Document in the list to select it. The Document is added to the row on the Personnel Documents tab. 643 ...we Naos( • A029.sed Mast eince•Ceossel a Do. Mtn% w r. OconinGth SOW 4. To save the Documents setting, click Save and Close or Save and New on the Personnel Editor. Adding a Private Document to a Personnel Record To Add a Private Document 1. From the Documents tab of the Personnel Editor, click Add Private Document (If this button is unavailable, it means that the maximum number of Documents for this Personnel record are already configured.) A new row appears in the table with Import File in the Select field. 2. Click Import File. A standard Windows file dialog box, Import Document from File, opens. The Files of type field on the bottom reads Documents (*.pdf; *.bct) which filters the files lists to only those two types. Clicking the down-arrow opens a drop-down with further file type filters: Image Files (*.bmp;*.jpe&*.gif; *.png) and MI Files (*.*). 3. Navigate to the file you want to add to this Personnel Record as a Document, select it, and click Open. The Document is added to the list on the Personnel Documents tab. 4. To save the Documents setting, click Save and Close or Save and New on the Personnel Editor. Removing a Document File from a Personnel Record To Remove a Document 1. From the Documents tab of the Personnel Editor, click the row of the Document in the list that you wish to remove. 2. Click Remove to remove the selected Document from the list. 3. To save the Documents setting, click Save and Close or Save and New on the Personnel Editor. Viewing a Document Belonging to a Personnel Record You can only view "Private Documents" added to a Personnel record on the Document tab of the Personnel Record to which it belongs. Private Documents cannot be displayed in a Dynamic View. Only Documents added to the system 94 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226907 Personnel Documents Tab with the Document Editor—"shared Documents" —can be viewed in a Dynamic View as well as on the Personnel Document tab. (See the C•CURE 9000 Personnel Guide.) To View a Document 1. From the Documents tab of the Personnel Editor, click the row of the Document in the list that you wish to view. 2. Click View Document to view the selected Document. • If the selected Document is a URL or a PDF, DC, XML, or an Image File whose Viewer is supported by the browser, it opens for viewing in the bottom half of the Documents tab. • 03P.Ita0111111111 PEMISIMIDOOmni ...EstopDoane'. • V.P.:Pcune atolm 1O—C Li s <Wig, GiPool Peach 15.0..1 low.] ORIPPISahna CJa tolls Lows,* ErstP,I.P.pdSlifel PM Pap PS, k wtostfiaMobninileaNIMIthrovelamt Eats-PPP* hapelt.....x.•G•n(yer Aarermal Panne Ca...A.54v ktYLCCAQUOOMOSCI.TY4fewseNtmeCCUPIII0,20 ur Ana" 99EN .1pAP‘.01.4PSOppe PopPC CUP( 9Xtr,i0 39k0 • If the selected Document is another type of file, such as a Word DOC file or an Excel XIS file, a File Download dialog box appears asking "Do you want to open or save this file?" Click Open and the file appears in an external window in its native format with buttons that allow you to edit the file. Image files whose viewer is not supported by the browser, TIF files, for example, open in whichever Graphics application format you have on your system—such as Paint Shop Pro or Paint. (Depending on how the application settings for opening in a browser are set, the DOC, PPT, or XIS file may open in the Content area.) 3. When you are finished viewing the Document, you can close the Documents tab or the Personnel window. NOTE Although you can seemingly edit and save the changes to a Document that opens for viewing in an external application, like Word, Excel, or Paint Shop Pro, such changes are not saved in the C•CURE 9000 system. (To make changes to any Document, you have to make them outside of C•CURE 9000 and then re￾assign the Document within the system.) C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 95 EFTA01226908 PersonneiPersonneiTriggersTab Personnel Personnel Triggers Tab The Personnel Personnel Triggers Tab lets you add and configure a trigger for a person that pulses an Event whenever a 'Card Admitted'/'Card Rejected' message is logged to the Journal for him/her at the defined Door/Elevator. NOTE The Primary Object of the Card Admitted/Card Rejected journal message that kicks off the Event is the name of the individual for which the trigger is configured, while the Secondary Object is the Door/Elevator. The following example shows the format of the message Example: 'Event "Event Name" is pulsed by "Card Admitted (or Rejected)" of Personnel "Person Name" at Door (or Elevator) "Door(Elevator) Name"' See Personnel Triggers Tab Definitions on Page 96 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Triggers tab. Figure 26 on Page 96 shows the Personnel Triggers tab. Figure 26: Personnel Triggers Tab fir -1=4,ndo:se C;sv.w4tont kis,0 ea G.• chwets I a.m.] Cuomo I Curet- . 4I I.KAI 9.6701 Dab. 0.W.M. I P... Dye, P^und Tv,. I Personnel Triggers Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Personnel Triggers tab are shown in Table14 on Page 97. 96 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226909 Personnel Personnel Triggers Tab Table 14: Personnel Personnel Triggers Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Add Personnel Trigger Click this button to add a new Personnel Trigger. A Name Selection dialog boxopens to allow you to choose either the Door object type ( the default) or the Elevator object type and the specific Door/Elevator. You can then select a Card Admitted/Card Rejected Journal Message and the Event and Schedule for this trigger. Remove Personnel Trigger Select a trigger row and click this button to remove the selected row. Door or Elevator Displays the Door or Elevator you selected from the Name Selection dialog box.. Journal Message Click the down-arrow to select Card Admitted or Card Rejected from the drop-down list. Event Click in this field to display ... and then click this button to select the Event to be pulsed when the Journal Message selected in the preceding field is logged to the journal for the Door or Elevator selected in the first field. You can select either a host Event or a panel Event. • When the home panel of a panel Event is offline. pulsing the Event does nothing, but if the home panel of the Door/Elevator is offline, pulsing the Event is postponed until com m u nication is restored. Schedule Click in this field to display ... I and then click this button to select the Schedule on which the Event is pulsed when the selected Journal Message is logged for the Door/ Elevator selected in the first field.. Time Zone Displays the Door/Elevator Time Zone (read-onty). NOTE: This is the Time Zone of the STAR Controller for the Door or Elevator. If the Controller does not have an assigned Time Zone, the Time Zone of the Server isdisplayed. Personnel Personnel Triggers Tab Tasks You can perform the following tasks from the Personnel Triggers tab: ■ Adding a Personnel Trigger on Page 97. ■ Removing a Personnel Trigger on Page 98. Adding a Personnel Trigger You can add a Trigger to a Personnel record that pulses an Event whenever a Card Admitted/Card Rejected message is logged to the journal for that person at a defined Door/Elevator. The Event will be pulsed based on the selected Schedule within the selected Door's/Elevator's Time Zone. To Add a Trigger 1. From the Personnel Triggers tab of the Personnel Editor, click Add Personnel Trigger. A Name Selection dialog box appears with Door entered as the default in the Object Selection box Select Type field. 2. Click one of the Doors from the list below to select a Door. - or - Click ri in the Select Type field to open the Select Type dialog box to select an Elevator. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 2 97 EFTA01226910 Personnel Personnel Triggers Tab a. Click Elevator in the Class field in the list below. The Name Selection dialog box reappears with Elevator entered in the Object Selection box Select Type field and the Elevators available in the system listed below. b. Click one of the listed Elevators to select it. 3. A new row appears in the table with the Door/Elevator you selected in the Door or Elevator field. 4. Click the down-arrow in the Journal Message field to display a drop-down list with 2 choices, Card Admitted and Card Rejected, and select one of the two. The message you chose displays in the Journal Message field. 5. Click ED in the Event field to open the Event selection dialog box and click an Event in the list to select it. The Event you chose displays in the Event field. 6. Click Ej in the Schedule field to open the Schedule selection dialog box and click a Schedule in the list to select it. The Schedule you chose displays in the Schedule field. 7. The Time Zone field behaves as follows: • If the iSTAR Controller for the selected Door/Elevator has an associated Time Zone, that Time Zone is displayed. (This field is read-only and is filled by the system once you select the Door or Elevator.) • If the iSTAR Controller for the selected Door/Elevator does not have an associated Time Zone, the time zone is assumed to be that of the Server, but is not displayed at all. The Personnel Triggers tab now looks as shown in the following example: Geed] Crogina Oren. I Cavil Cunn Inwood I tnsti Bet; La...Ova Atm. D.. ,WEa4 W. I —E4Orscr.:CPsot. 'itetaePersorteltiqp /toot I ,Mmellimap Wells IniZawelebasOlnest 8. To create more Triggers for this person, repeat the preceding steps. 9. To save the Personnel Triggers you configured, click Save and Close. Removing a Personnel Trigger To Remove a Personnel Trigger 1. From the Personnel Triggers tab of the Personnel Editor, click the row in the table that you wish to remove. To select a row, click the row selector. The row is highlighted, and the row selector changes to hTO . 2. Click Remove Personnel Trigger. 3. To save the Personnel Triggers settings, click Save and Close. 98 Chapter 2 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226911 3 Personnel Type The C•CURE 9000 Personnel Type Editor is used to create Personnel Type objects to reflect the job titles and roles for the people who need access to your site. In this chapter Personnel Type Overview 100 Samples of Expiration Time Span Settings 104 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 3 99 EFTA01226912 Personnel Type Overview Personnel Type Overview A Personnel Type lets you categorize each Personnel record in your database based on the person's role or type. By default you can choose Employee, Contractor, Visitor, or None. However, you can also use the Personnel Type Editor to define additional Personnel Types to suit your site. Example: If you wanted to identify Personnel records as Security Personnel, Maintenance Personnel, Temporary Employees, or any other employee category, you can create these new Personnel Types and then assign the type to Personnel records in your database. Figure 27 on Page 100 shows the Personnel Type editor. Figure 27: Personnel Type editor Name Qe.C.thak J Pena Delta Era Deka Envie= &We &einem TentSoan Dige• Dedered Ebeeden Ise r Nee I 24 aw, r lion NAY l Actriatem Dale Tme Tem a Ethethee Ir io2504 E1 r gesCupent0oThe You INV sagely to Sal apialka Ss Ix now Ceded* et • melba el Hatt D. a Yea. flea to Ciedeniefe median tine /sande, l Feu apecly the deletIl aviation lire in Der a Veen, you my dm me* the weak ere d day the OPUS to teat II you *el net to. totine el day then mosenn mutt we be the the teed 6to *dies not cawed le000*Pthed Edith! la Overriding the Default Time Span of Expiration for a Personnel Type The setting for the Personnel system variable TimeSpan of Expiration specifies the time period past the creation date of a credential to use for the default expiration date of a new credential. (See Personnel System Variables in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for more information). You can change this default value for a specific Personnel Type by selecting Enable Default Expiration Override in the Personnel Type editor. 100 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226913 Personnel Type Overview Example: If the default value set by the system variable TimeSpan of Expiration is five years, and you want to set the default value for new credentials for Personnel assigned the Visitor Personnel Type to five days, you can change this default while editing the Visitor Personnel Type by selecting Enable Default Expiration Override in the Personnel Type editor and changing the setting. The Default Credential Expiration Time is expressed in Years, Days, or Hours. When Years or Days is selected, you can specify the Time of Expiration - the time of day that Expiration occurs. When Hours is selected, the Time of Expiration is unavailable. If you want to base the expiration date of Credentials for a Personnel Type on a Date field in the Personnel record, you can select a date field from the From drop-down list. You can also chose to select the current year as the starting point for the expiration period. Example: You want Credentials for the Employee Personnel Type to expire on each person's birthdate three years after activation. Your database uses the Datel field from the Personnel Customer tab to contain the person's birthdate. ■ Select Enable Default Expiration Override. ■ Select a Default Credential Expiration Time of 3 Years. ■ Select Datel in the From drop-down list. ■ Select Use Current Day's Year. With these selections, all subsequently created Personnel of type Employee will have their Credential expire on their birthday three years after the Credential is issued. For more examples of of how to use this setting, see Samples of Expiration Time Span Settings on Page 104. To Set the Expiration Time Span for Credentials Assigned to Personnel of a Personnel Type 1. Click the Personnel pane button in the Administration Station. 2. Select Personnel Type from the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar. 3. Click ai m to open a Dynamic View showing all Personnel Type objects. 4. Double-click the name of the Personnel Type in the list that you want to edit. 5. Select Enable Default Expiration Override. 6. Set the numeric portion of the Default Credential Expiration Time by typing a number or clicking M. 7. Choose Years, Days, or Hours to set the time period. 8. You can choose a Personnel Date Field to set a specific date on which you want Credentials of this Personnel Type to expire (as an alternative to the default setting - Activation Date Time). Example: If the Personnel field Date 1 on the Customer tab represents the birthday of Personnel, choosing that field for the From date would set the Expiration Date to the Date 1 setting (their birthday) for each person. 9. If you chose Years or Days for the time period, you can select a Time of Expiration by selecting the check box I F 2:02 PM and using to change the hour, minutes, and AM/PM setting. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 3 101 EFTA01226914 Personnel Type Overview 10. Click Save and Close to save your changes. Setting Disabling by Inactivity Periods for Personnel In addition, the Personnel Type Editor lets you determine which Personnel Credentials will be disabled when the 'Disable by Inactivity' service is configured to run daily. You use this Personnel Type Editor to configure the inactivity period for the different Personnel Types in your system. (The 'inactivity period' is the number of days a person's access card is permitted to go without valid card activity before that Credential is automatically disabled.) For more information, see: • Disabling Credentials for Inactivity Overview on Page 26 • Configuring the Disable by Inactivity Process for Personnel Credentials on Page 44 Personnel Type Definitions The following table gives definitions of the fields in the Personnel Type Editor. Table 15: Personnel Type Editor Definitions Field Description Name Type a name for the Personnel Type you arecreating. Description Type a description that will help you identify this Personnel Type or its intended usage. Partition A read-onty field displaying the partition to which this Personnel Type belongs. This field is visible onty d the C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned. Can Be Visitor if thischeck box is selected, Personnel assigned to this Personnel Type can be assigned asVisitors for the Visitor Management application. Enable Default Expiration Override Enable this option to set up a Default Credential Expiration Time for this Personnel Type that is different from the overall setting for the Personnel system variable TlmeSpan of Expiration. You can use this to set up a Personnel Type that has a shorter or longer Expiration timespan than the default. This could be useful for a temporary employee type, for example. Default Credential Expiration Time You can set a timespan for the default period after which Credentia ks of a person assigned to this Personnel Type expire automaticalty. After you select a Number. you can set the unit of time to Years. Days. or Hours. Number Type or use •••• to set the number for the Default Credential Expiration Time. The range of numbers is determined by the Years, Days, or Hours setting. Maximum settings are: Years: 24 Days: 99 Hours: 24 Years. Days. Hours Choose one of these time measurements byclicking the radio button. 102 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guido EFTA01226915 Personnel Type Overview Personnel Type Editor Definitions (continued) Field Description From You can select one of the following date fields from Personnel to use as the beginning date for the Default Credential Expiration Time (instead of the Activation Date Time default). Available fields are: • Activation Date r Imo (Credential ) - Thiss the default choice for a Credential when created via the Personnel Credential tab or the Credential editor. If you choose another field, the Hours time measurement isnot available (because the Date fieldsdo not support Hours). • Date1 (from the Personnel Customer tab - if the field label has been changed, the new label appears in this drop-down list) • Date2 (from the Personnel Customer tab - if the field label has been changed, the new label appears in this drop-down list) • Date3 (from the Personnel Customer Extended tab - if the field label has been changed, the new label appears in this drop￾down list) • Date4 (from the Personnel Customer Extended tab - if the field label has been changed, the new label appears in thisdrop￾down list) The Value of the field (for each record) is used to determine the expiration date of the related Personnel Credential. For examplesof how to use this setting, see Samplesof Expiration Time Span Settings on Page 104. Use Current Day's Year Check this box to use the Month and Date of the From field, along with the current year, for beginning of the period defined by the Credential Expiration Time. When this box snot checked, the entire date in the From field is used to signify the start of the Credential Expiration Time period. Example: if the date in the From field is 10/20/2014 and thischeck box isdeared, the Expiration Date will become 10/20/2014 plus the duration specified in Default Credential Expiration Time. If the check box is checked. the start of the Default Credential Expiration Time will be 10/20 of the current year. Time of Expiration You can set the time of day that a credential associated with this Personnel Type expires. Select the check box, then use '.'. to change the hour, minutes, and AM/PM setting. this setting song available if you chose Yearsor Days as a unit of measurement. Inactivity Period The number of days without valid card activities that can elapse for Personnel with this Personnel Type before an enabled/running Disable by inactivity service disables the Credential. This setting song used if the System Variable for Disable by inactivity is enabled, and the Disable by Inactivity service is running. For more information, see the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide section on Personnel System Variables. The default value for this field is 0 (zero), which means that Personnel with this Personnel Type will never be disabled by inactivity. Using the Personnel Type Context Menu The Personnel Type context menu in the Dynamic View of Personnel Types includes the selections common to all objects, as well as additional selections specific to Personnel Types. See Using the Object List Context Menu on Page 23 for more information on the common selections. You can select one or more Personnel Types in the Dynamic View (using SHIFT+Left-click and CTRL+Left-click) and perform functions such as Set properties (Change Description and/or Inactivity Period), Add Personnel to Groups, or Export Personnel Type, using the context menu. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 3 103 EFTA01226916 Sampiesot Expiration Time Span Settings Samples of Expiration Time Span Settings You can set the Expiration Time Span for Credentials added to Personnel records in three ways: • You can set the Expiration Time span for all new Credentials with the TimeSpan of Expiration System Variable. • You can set the Expiration Time span for all new Credentials of a Personnel Type from the Personnel Type editor. • You can set the Expiration Time span for one or more Temporary Credentials using the context menu selection Activate Temporary. C•CURE 9000 can calculate the default Expiration Date for Credentials based on: • The System generated Activation Date/rime (the time when the Credential was created). • One of the four Customer/Extended tab date fields (Datel to Date4). Following are examples of setting the Expiration Time Span using these methods. Example: Set the TimeSpan of Expiration System Variable for all New Credentials When you create a new Credential, the Activation Date/Time is set to the current date and time. If you use the settings shown below, the Credential will expire 3 years after the date the Credential was created. Sy,t. Save endorse • Etoia6on Fine Span You tney :peaty the dial esdiatian tiM03 fat r Dodged* ea a rata dNowt, Days a Yeats km ;mac Cadhokla Dale Fat Addanak F you ;day ihe ddadt madman fate in Deno/Yea You may the sway the ow& d cite lid *dation caw If you dud not to. the lime et I* when meaty, ways tad el day the aedenedl we: mated Detail Credential Expiation Ida tt.' yews r Qa0 r Han Dom Coto* Date Fait 'Atte/mon Dote/Tyre r Uste cat Yew to Camila Emialideate ▪ Mew Sample I fine d Expeolicet nta Ze If you select a different Cardholder Date Field, the system uses the date in that field to calculate when the Credential will expire. In this example, all New Credentials will expire 99 days after the date in the Date2 field in the cardholder's Personnel record. 104 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226917 Samples of Expiration Time Span Settings if system earrebles lave ar4Clese NOM Expiation Tine Soon You may spicily the dela meitatem limes for new Creckerith a a ratites a Has:. Day: 04 Yea: lam spec& Came* Date kit Addrionaly.. I you Testy the dela* expiator" tore in Day: a Year:. sea may also merely the lime& erne dday the MOWS, WM Ocas If you elect earn. the ire Cl day wean expiebin ecass velem the the lined day the etedentsi we: carted Dana Credential Expiation Tao a yews I 9/) r QaYs E. Cattalo Dale Feu IDele2 r use Comma Yes to Caactaato ExvireacrOate Yiew ter* Ina el Etageres mFu Example: Set the Expiration Time Span for Temporary Credentials using Activate Temporary When you Activate a Temporary Credential, you cannot choose a cardholder date field; the Activation Date/Time is set to the current date and time. If you use the settings shown below, the Credential will expire 5 years after the date the Credential was created. Delet4t Ciedential Expraton Tine ✓ items • aays • Hours Example: Calculate from Cardholder Activation Date/Time When you create a new Credential, the Activation Date/Time is set to the current date and time. If you use the settings shown below, the Credential will expire 5 years after the date the Credential was created. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 3 105 EFTA01226918 Samples of Expiration Time Span Settings Detail Cadential Expiation Tine r Yeats r Ears r• HOOTS Rom Can:bade( Date Field Example: Calculate from Cardholder Customer Date Field If you use one of the Customer/Extended Tab Date fields for this calculation, the Credential will expire 5 years after the date in the field chosen. —DefaAt Dedential Expiation Time Yeas 5 r E;om Catch:filet Date Field Datel r We Current Yea to Calculate ExpiatanDate %hew Sarni* Example: Calculate from Cardholder Hire Date Field If you use one of the Customer/Extended Tab Date fields to represent the cardholder's date of hiring (such as using the Datel field as the hire date), the Credential will expire 5 years after the cardholder's Hire date. Dedenbal Expiation Time 6. Years 5 r EIOM Can:A:Mei Date Field Example: Calculate from Cardholder BirthDate Field If you use one of the Customer/Extended Tab Date fields to represent the cardholder's birthdate (using the Datel field as the birth date), you can select Use current year to calculate Expiration Date to have Credential expire 5 years from the current year on the cardholder's birthday. 108 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226919 Samples of Expiration Time Span Settings Ddauk Ciederitial Emitatico Time Years r r From Catdholdei Date Fad: Datel (P Use Curer Year to Cdeaste EmitatiteDate 'ie. Sample C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 3 107 EFTA01226920 Samples of Expiration Time Span Settings 108 Chapter 3 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226921 4 Clearance A Clearance defines the locations and times an access card is valid. In C•CURE 9000, you create Clearance objects to define the access to specific doors and elevators on specified schedules, and then assign these clearances to individual cardholders, or groups of cardholders. In this chapter Clearance Editor 110 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter< 109 EFTA01226922 Clearance Editor Clearance Editor The Clearance Editor in C•CURE 9000 lets you create Clearance objects that define the security objects that a person assigned the Clearance can access. The following sections give more information about the Clearance object and how to use it. ■ Clearance General Tab on Page 114 ■ Clearance Doors Tab on Page 115 ■ Clearance Elevators Tab on Page 116 ■ Clearance Groups Tab on Page 118 ■ Clearance Tasks on Page 110 Clearance Tasks The following tasks can be performed with the Clearances Editor. ■ Personnel Object Tasks on Page 18 ■ Accessing the Clearance Editor on Page 110 ■ Creating a Clearance on Page 111 ■ Configuring a Clearance on Page 111 ■ Adding Doors or Door Groups to a Clearance on Page 112 ■ Adding Elevators or Elevator Groups to a Clearance on Page 113 ■ Removing Doors/Door Groups and Elevators/Elevator Groups from a Clearance on Page 114 ■ Clearance Groups Tab on Page 118 ■ Adding a Clearance to a Group on Page 119 Accessing the Clearance Editor You can access the Clearance Editor from the C•CURE 9000 Personnel pane. To Access the Clearance Editor 1. Click the Personnel pane button. 2. Click the Personnel drop-down list and select Clearance. 3. Click aim to open a Dynamic View showing all Clearance objects. 4. Double-click the Clearance in the list that you want to edit. The Clearance Editor opens. See Figure 28 on Page 111. 110 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226923 Clearance Editor Figure 28: Clearance Editor Creating a Clearance You can create a new Clearance to assign access privileges to a person.To create a Clearance, follow the steps in Creating an Object on Page 18. When you create a Clearance, you specify the activation and expiration dates for the Clearance, as well as the Doors, Door Groups, Elevators, and Elevator Groups that are controlled by the Clearance. When you assign Doors or Elevators to a Clearance, Software House recommends that you assign Doors or Elevators from the same controller type to the Clearance. For example, it is better for system operation to assign Doors from several iSTAR controllers to a Clearance, rather than some Doors from iSTAR controllers and some Doors from apC controllers. NOTE Configuring a Clearance You can configure a Clearance for use with personnel in C•CURE 9000. To Configure a Clearance 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select Clearance from the Personnel drop-down list. 3. Click New. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 4 111 EFTA01226924 Clearance Editor - Or - Click gag to view a list of existing Clearances, right-click the Clearance you wish to configure, and choose Edit from the context menu. The Clearance Editor opens. 4. In the Name field, type the name that you want to use for this Clearance. 5. In the Description field, enter any information that would be useful for identifying the Clearance or explaining the settings you have chosen. 6. On the Clearance General tab, choose activation and expiration settings for the Clearance. 7. On the Clearance Doors tab, select the Doors (or Door Groups) that are controlled by this Clearance. See Adding Doors or Door Groups to a Clearance on Page 112. 8. On the Clearance Elevators tab, select the Elevators (or Elevator Groups) that are controlled by this Clearance. See Adding Elevators or Elevator Groups to a Clearance on Page 113. 9. On the Clearance Groups tab, view the list of the Clearance Groups to which this clearance belongs. If you want to add the Clearance to a Clearance Group, see Clearance Groups Tab on Page 118. 10. To save your modified Clearance, click Save and Close . Adding Doors or Door Groups to a Clearance You can add Doors or Door Groups to a Clearance by adding rows to the Doors and Door Groups table on the Clearance Doors tab (see Figure 30 on Page 116). NOTE Once a Clearance has been saved, while you can add (and edit) new Doors/Door Groups as described in the following procedure, you cannot edit the existing saved items. To make changes to existing Doors/Door Groups, you have to delete the item and then re-create it. For information, see Removing Doors/Door Groups and Elevators/Elevator Groups from a Clearance on Page 114 To Add Doors or Door Groups to a Clearance 1. From the Clearance Editor, click on the Doors tab. 2. Click Add and the Name Selection dialog box for Doors appears, with both Doors and Door Groups displayed. 112 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226925 Clearance Editor Figure 29: Name Selection Dialog Box- Doors L-I- M.... OKA r C.a. Cu oe r .STan oar Gray r .STAR Door Grote.? r Dos I-ISTJAClus laCenotae. 0.04ST AfClualICOre ot Deel.StACI‘elACenerorr C Z-.STSACluelKesesece. r Oste).STARO. r DoerlosTAPCiuslAcemtor... L 3. Click to display only Door objects or IT.1 to display only Door Groups. 4. Click 'n the check box(es) to select as many of the Doors or Door Groups as you wish and then click OK. (You can click CTRL + A and then a check box to select all the objects.) The Schedule selection list dialog box appears. 5. Click the Schedule you want to add to the Clearance for those Door(s)/Door Group(s). The selection list dialog box closes and a row appears in the Doors and Door Groups table for each Door/Door Group you selected with the Schedule selection added to the row. (If you added a Group, the Door Group column in the table is selected El.) 6. If ou wish to change the Schedule for any Door(s)/Door Group(s), click in the Schedule field and then click •••1 to select a different Schedule from the Schedule selection list dialog box that re-opens. 7. If you wish to change the selected Door/Door Group for any row, click in the Door Name field and then click in to select the Door/Door Group from the Door selection list dialog box that re-opens. 8. When you are done adding Doors and Schedules to the Clearance, click Save and Close to save the Clearance. Adding Elevators or Elevator Groups to a Clearance You can add Elevators or Elevator Groups to a Clearance by adding rows to the Elevators and Elevator Groups table on the Clearance Elevators tab (see Figure 31 on Page 117). NOTE Once a Clearance has been saved, while you can add (and edit) new Elevators/Elevator Groups as described in the following procedure, you cannot edit the existing saved items. To make changes to existing Elevators/Elevator Groups, you have to delete the item and then re￾create it. For information, see Removing Doors/Door Groups and Elevators/Elevator Groups from a Clearance on Page 114 To Add Elevators or Elevator Groups to a Clearance 1. From the Clearance Editor, click the Elevators tab. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter < 113 EFTA01226926 Clearance Editor 2. Click Add and the Name Selection dialog box for Elevators appears, with both Elevators and Elevator Groups displayed. 3. Click to display only Elevator objects or CI to display only Elevator Groups. 4. Click 'n the check box(es) to select as many of the Elevators or Elevator Groups as you wish and then click OK. (You can click CTRL + A and then a check box to select all the objects.) The Schedule selection list dialog box appears. 5. Click the Schedule you want to add to the Clearance for those Elevator(s)/Elevator Group(s). The selection list dialog box closes and a row appears in the Elevators and Elevator Groups table for each Elevator/Elevator Group you selected with the Schedule selection added to the row. (If you added a Group, the Elevator Group column in the table is selected El.) 6. Click in the Floor Name field and then click ri to select the Floor or Floor Group for the Clearance. The Floor dialog box appears. 7. dick to display only Floor objects or to display only Floor Groups. 8. Click the Floor or Floor Group you want to add to the Clearance. The dialog box closes and the selection is added to the row. (If you added a Group, the Floor Group column in the table is selected Q. ) 9. If you wish to change the Schedule for any Elevator(s)/Elevator Group(s), click in the Schedule field and then click E) to select a different Schedule from the Schedule selection list dialog box that re-opens. 10. If you wish to change the selected Elevator/Elevator Group for any row, click in the Elevator Name field and then click ri to select the Elevator/Elevator Group from the Elevator selection list dialog box that opens. You can change the selected Floor/Floor Group for any row in the same way. 11. When you are done adding Elevators, Floors, and Schedules to the Clearance, click Save and Close to save the Clearance. Removing Doors/Door Groups and Elevators/Elevator Groups from a Clearance To Remove a Door/Door Group or Elevator/Elevator Group 1. From the Door/Elevators tab of the Clearances Editor, click the row in the table that you wish to remove. (To select a row, click on the row selector. The row is highlighted, and the row selector changes to k 2. Click Remove. You can then save the Clearance as is or add or remove more Door/Door Groups and/or Elevators/Elevator Groups. Clearance General Tab The Clearance General tab (see Figure 28 on Page 111) lets you create a name and description for a Clearance, and define the Activation and Expiration dates for the Clearance. 114 Chapter < C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226927 Clearance Editor Table 16: Clearance General Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Name Type a name for the Clearance. Description Type a textual description of the Clearance that will give you enough information to distinguish this Clearance from other similar Clearances. Partition A read-only field displaying the partition to which this Clearance belongs. This field is visible only if the C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned. Clearance Activation Status This set of field shows the dates on which the Clearance is activated and the date it expires. Active on Set a Clearance to become active on a future date if you want to create and assign the Clearance in advance. The Clearance does not allow access before the date you set. Select the check box and click the down-arrow to set a date using the calendar control. If the check box is not selected. the date is ignored. Expireson Set a Clearance to become inactive on a future date if you want to create and assign a Clearance that is temporary. The Clearance does not allow access after the date you set. Select the check box and click the down arrow to set a date using the calendar control. If the check box snot selected, the date is ignored. Save and Close Click Save and Close when you have completed any changes to a Clearance and wish to save those changes. Save and New Click Save and New when you have completed a ny cha nges to the Clearance and wish to save those changes. and you also want to create a new Clearance. The Clearance you were editing is saved. and a new Clearance opens. ClickClose when you want to close the Clearance Editor without saving your changes. A prompt appears so that you can choose to continue editing or close the editor. Click OK to close the editor without saving changes, or click Cancel to continue editing the Clearance. X Clearance Doors Tab The Clearance Doors tab (see Figure 30 on Page 116) lets you specify the Doors and Door Groups that are accessible from a Clearance. When the Clearance is assigned to a person, that person can access the Doors in the list at the times specified by the Schedule associated with that Door or Door Group. Table 17: Clearance Doors Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Doors and Door Groups This table is used to build a list of the Doors/ Door Groups that are included in this Clearance. The Doors, Door Groups each have a Schedule object associated with them to specify when a person with this Clearance can access the Doors. Door Group This check box is selected if you chose a Door Group. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 0 115 EFTA01226928 Clearance Editor Clearance Doors Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Door Name Once you have selected one or more Doors/Door Groups and an associated Schedule, a row is added to the table for each Door object added to the Clearance with its name in this field. NOTE: Before the Clearance Is saved, you can change the selected Door/Door Group for a row byclicking in this field and then clicking I: . Select a new Door/Door Group from the Door dialog box that opens to add it to the Clearance. Door Schedule Once you have selected one or more Doors/Door Groups and an associated Schedule, the Schedule for each selected Door object is added to the Clearance and displays in this field. NOTE: Before the Clearance Is saved. you can change the selected Schedule by clicking in this field and then clicking Eh Select a new Schedule from the Schedule dialog box that opens to add it to the Clearance. Add Click this button to open a Name Selection dialog box for Doors/Door Groups. Once you have selected one or more Doors/Door Groups and clicked OK, a Schedule dialog box opens for you to select a Schedule for the chosen Door objects. Anew row is added to the table for each Door/Door Group selected with its associated Schedule. Remove Click this button to remove the selected row from the table. Figure 30: Clearance Doors Tab Cle114•%! • CIttellACC Raw eld9•1 ia Inane Ono l3 Savo and titre bone Onantem Rear IlleyO Onvcton Oons. Doe+ uwan cos 11)001.11ed Dor Groups .F Sad F. Porno.* Doe TAWS. C•na•ST APO. Coe.".STAACLA Occ0.51/40.• ,STAR ParCrs. $5101 Pax Grow Clearance Elevators Tab The Clearance Elevators tab (see Figure 31 on Page 117) lets you specify the Elevators and Elevator Groups that are accessible from a Clearance. When the Clearance is assigned to a person, that person can access the Elevators in the list at the times specified by the Schedule associated with that Elevator or Elevator Group. 116 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226929 Clearance Editor Table 18: Clearance Elevators Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Elevators and Elevator Groups This table is used to build a list of the Elevators/ Elevator Groups that are included in this Clearance. The Elevators/ Elevator Groups each have a Schedule object associated with them to specify when a person with this Clearance can access the Elevators. Elevator Group Thischeck box is selected if you chose an Elevator Group. Elevator Name Once you have selected one or more Elevators/ Elevator Groups and an associated Schedule. a row is added to the table for each Elevator object added to the Clearance with its name in this field. NOTE: Before the Clearance Is saved, you can change the selected Elevator/Elevator Group for a row by clicking in this field and then clicking I: . Select a new Elevator/Elevator Group from the Elevator dialog box that opens to add it to the Clearance. Floor Group This check box is selected if you chose a Floor Group rather than a single Floor Floor Name Click in this field, and then darn to open a selection dialog box listing the available Fbors/Fbor Groups. Select a Floor/Floor Group to add it to the Clearance. Elevator Schedule Once you have selected one or more Elevators/Elevator Groups and an associated Schedule. the Schedule for each selected Elevator object is added to the Clearance and displays in this field. NOTE: Before the Clearance Is saved. you can change the selected Schedule byclicking in this field and then clicking El. Select a new Schedule from the Schedule dialog box that opens to add it to the Clearance. Add Click this button to open a Name Select Ion dialog box for Elevators/ Elevator Groups. Once you have selected one or more Elevators/ Elevator Groups and clicked OK. a Schedule dialog box opens for you to select a Schedule for the chosen Elevator objects. Anew row is added to the table for each Elevator/ Elevator Group selected with its associated Schedule. NOTE: You have to select and add a Fbor/Fbor Group manualty for each Elevator/Schedule row . Remove Click this button to remove the selected row(s) from the table. Figure 31: Clearance Elevators Tab cI.veae. - la Caw 4.41 C1o.A.P w Save and rie. tOme O•avarc• glee Odom Q.K.eben Con.. [Oa glevaa‘ flora.• Cass .1. Add r. Rmeve Doter°, ow. Esenece Paw, Ace Nen Ceow Sonita. Scielkie Ica 'PSC cower 'Iran therew.Z.S. A/E0•, hroVa tiradep.).:TAI.O.alACceMe Otate.4.>TARCIJOACeree rt..) Mow: Asa C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 4 117 EFTA01226930 Clearance Editor Clearance Groups Tab Groups are used for organizing C•CURE 9000 objects and are created from the Configuration Pane. You can configure groups of controllers, inputs, outputs, readers, clearances, and other security objects. The Clearance Groups tab (see Figure 32 on Page 118) lists the Clearance Groups to which the Clearance you are editing belongs. You can double-click a Clearance Group in the list to edit the Clearance, view the Clearances that are members of the Group, and add Clearances to the Group. Figure 32: Clearance GroupsTab An Dscetias durance I Pt 0da* ;aryl Dmw I Owen Gtwis Cnras AR. VP& CO„ Frog colurnnt to grow) bihote MW Doetko • CI, YNXP Groyl Refer to the Dynamic Views chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Data Views User Guide for more information about the use of the buttons found in the Groups tab. Adding Clearances to a Group from the Clearance Groups Tab You can add a Clearance to a Group by editing a Clearance Group listed on the Clearance Groups tab. To Add a Clearance to a Clearance Group from the Groups Tab 1. When you double-click a Clearance Group row on the Clearances Group tab, the Group Editor General tab appears so that you can edit the Group. 2. Click Add on the Group General tab to add an object to the Clearance Group. 3. The Clearance dialog box opens to display a list of existing Clearances that can be added to the Clearance Group. 4. Click one or more Clearances in the list (using Windows multiple selection methods such as CTRL+click), and then click OK. 5. The Clearance(s) that you selected are added to the Group. 118 Chapter< C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226931 Clearance Editor Adding a Clearance to a Group If the Clearance you are editing is not a member of a Group, you can add it to a Group by right-clicking on the Clearance in a Clearances Dynamic View. To Add a Clearance To a Group 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select Clearances from the Personnel pane drop-down list. 3. Click wz to open a Dynamic View showing all Clearance objects. 4. Right-click the Clearance in the list that you want to add to a group and select Add To Group from the context menu. 5. In the dialog box that appears, click the Group to which you want to add the Clearance. 6. Click OK in the confirmation dialog box that appears. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gulls Chapter 4 119 EFTA01226932 Clearance Editor 120 Chapter 4 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226933 5 Credential A Credential is an access card or PIN defined in the C•CURE 9000 Personnel editor or the Credential editor. The Credential Dynamic View allows you to view a list of all Credentials in the system, and sort, filter and group the list. You can then open the Credential Editor to edit the Credential. In this chapter Credential Overview 122 Credential Dynamic View 124 Searching for Credentials 128 Credential Editor 132 Accessing The Credential Editor 133 Credential General Tab 134 Credential User-defined Fields Tab 138 Credential Badging Tab 139 Temporary Credential Tasks 140 System Variables for Credentials 148 Credentials Event Actions 149 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 121 EFTA01226934 Credential Overview Credential Overview Credentials in C•CURE 9000 are the database objects that represent access cards issued to Personnel. There are two types of Credential: Personnel Credentials Represent access cards and PINs that are permanently assigned to Personnel in the C•CURE 9000 database. Temporary Credentials Represent access cards that are used primarily for short term access, such as temporary replacement access cards for employees whose permanent Credentials have been lost, stolen, or disabled. Temporary Credentialscan be associated with a Personnel record, but can also exist independently in an Unassigned state. Temporary Credentials can also be used with the Visitor Management option to provide credentials for visiting personnel, who onty require access cards for the duration of their visit. (See the C•CURE 9000 Visitor Management Guide for more information). You can view the Credentials in C•CURE 9000 via the Credential Dynamic View (see Credential Dynamic View on Page 124). TIP To quickly determine which Person record owns an Assigned or Activated Temporary Credential, right-click on the Credential in the Credential Dynamic View and choose Edit Person. The owner's Personnel record opens in the Personnel editor so you can review the person and their credentials. You can create/edit Temporary Credentials and edit Personnel Credentials using the Credential editor (see Credential Editor on Page 132). You can create Personnel Credentials from the Personnel Credential tab (see Personnel Credentials Tab on Page 54). The following topics provide more information about using Credentials: ■ Managing Temporary Credentials on Page 140 discusses how to manage Temporary Credentials, including a workflow example for creating, allocating, tracking, and re-using your Temporary Credentials. ■ Credentials Event Actions on Page 149 explains the new Event actions that can be used to automate some of the management of Temporary Credentials. ■ System Variables for Credentials on Page 148 details the System Variables that are used to manage the activation and expiration of Temporary Credentials. ■ Using the Credential View Context Menu on Page 125 explains the menu selections that are available on the context menu of the Credential Dynamic View. Disable by Inactivity Credenti,11 Inactivity features (such as Disable by Inactivity) do not apply to Temporary Credentials. Enterprise Support for Temporary Credentials Temporary Credentials can be created in any Partition. A Temporary Credential can be assigned to a Personnel record in a different Partition, or on a different Application Server. A local Personnel record can be assigned a Global Temporary Credential, and a Global Personnel record can be assigned a local Temporary Credential. As a result, there may be instances where a Personnel record on a SAS cannot display some of the Temporary Credentials that are assigned to a person on a remote system. In such a case, a warning message box is displayed 122 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226935 Credential Overview when viewing the Personnel Credential tab that explains that "additional card(s) are assigned to this person" that are not visible from this SAS. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle Chapter 5 123 EFTA01226936 Credential Dynamic View Credential Dynamic View The Credential Dynamic View displays a list of all Credentials (both permanent and temporary). To Open the Credential Dynamic View 1. Follow the steps in Viewing a List of an Object Type on Page 20, choosing Credential from the Personnel pane drop-down list. 2. Click agai to open the Credential Dynamic View. Figure 33: Credential Dynamic View At VS°. cm..ts x 1-- aMililliiiiiii - • • • 6212. DO Y vb. 00s1 20 0.4.9 whavi• le group t9 ',ere — la I aria I Carat I Stw l Iwo Da A...sionDoWline Imam Lai sidet 0.0 t Mos" lam 6CC49:647 Can* Pole.91 6.025201.1 3 1100 r r r ONw1 93 Csdolet• 1041•14 1/4/2011 I 31911 r p p Watt Wotan 416310), C0.1009 arnaa3 1-04•9010d 0/77/20I4 222PNI P P r WY kapagto ea 24.32011371 Coady Petal Urm90.91 fref20141421014 P gi r Dom 010.09..lax• 0 CodOrly 10.0.03 0/294014 WPM r w r 0dM r 044s.Wierer. ISSItX0W CyclOdy mews V2712014101R4 r r r No hinpoollt5 119201120 PeCodOrly al PaCrof 09.4:94014 9/27/2011103FM P r r Dd•A Blea..Gon.. 1713251623 LSO* P0040 0/27/21314.1 03PM r r r 0dM Wtot Tr 910,6802 Candy Plat SW/70M 13,94 r r r elial — •0200 0:00 X40316223 Card04. 1041•10 Lina*Kribd 10/7/2014 11.3AM P r r Ddai 0 Cad Or.S. 130010 Wes•Cried 9/2/20111.0600 P P r Ddai ttno..x0o5 0 CardOdy Petan YAMS Of /03/2014 1022914 I II OM Gt r r C"I" 0,200409 0 CvdOrly P110.94 Uniso7.0 94/10111 ION P p p DOM ['Mat) Car4i1•11. •••••••••4 00, 014101 annmi•am au — — — ru.• 21 NOTE You can right-click on any column in the view to add or remove columns from the view. In particular, you can add a helpful column called Assigned To Personnel Name so that you can see the name of the Personnel record to whom a Temporary Credential is assigned. this field is blank if the card is not temporary, or if it is unassigned. You can use the Dynamic View controls to refresh, filter, print, etc. the contents of the Dynamic View, as explained in Viewing a List of an Object Type on Page 20. Table 19: Credential View Definitions Field/Button Definition Name The name of the Credential, or the Person name ascAniated with the Credential. Card Number The Card Number for the Credential. CHUID Format The CHUID format for the Credential. 124 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226937 Credential Dynamic View Table 19: Credential View Definitions (continued) Field/Button Definition S !ALF, Whether the Credential isAssigned, Activated, or Unassigned. Valid only for Temporary Credentials; for personnel Credentials, this field is blank. Unassigned - A Temporary Credential that is not assigned tea Personnel record. Assigned - A Temporary Credential that is assigned to a Personnel record, but is expired or not yet activated. Activated - A Temporary Credential that is assigned to a Personnel record and is actNated. Issue Date The Date the Credential was last issued (each time a Temporary Credential is activated, the Issue Date is set to the current date). Valid only for Temporary Credentials; for personnel Credentials, this field is blank. Activation Date/Time The date and Time that the CredentialwasActivated. Temporary Is thisa Temporary Credential? Lost Is the Credential marked Lost? Stolen Is the Credential marked Stolen? Partition Name The Partition in which the Credential resides. Using the Credential View Context Menu The Credential View context menu (see Figure 34 on Page 126) opens when you right-click on one or more Credentials in the Dynamic View of Credentials. You can select one or more Credentials in the Dynamic View (using multiple selection combinations such as SHIFT+Left-click and CTRL+Left-click) and perform functions such as Set Property, Export Selection, and Batch Print Badges using the context menu. Using the Object List Context Menu on Page 23 for information about using the context menu. See Table 20 on Page 126 for definitions of the Credential View-specific context menu selections. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 125 EFTA01226938 Credential Dynamic View Figure 34: Credential View Context Menu Edit Delete Set property Export selection... Find in Audit Log... Edit Person Batch Print Badges Email Reminder Mark Lost Mark Stolen Activate Temporary Return Temporary Table 20: Credential View Context Menu Selection Description Edit Person Select to open the Personnel Editor for the person assigned to the Credential. Not available for Unassigned Credentials. NOTE: This selection provides the quickest way to determine which person is assigned to a Temporary Credential. Batch Print Badges Select one or more badges in the Credential Dynamic View and click this menu selection to batch print the selected badge(s). Depending on your Badge Setup Printer Settings, the badges either print automaticalty or are added to the Batch Print Queue. If the badges are queued, the C•CURE ID Batch Print Manager dialog box opens to allow you to manage the print queue. From this dialog you can choose to print these badges and a ny other badges currentty in the queue. Email Reminder Available onty for Temporary Credentials that are Activated or Assigned to Personnel records that have an Email address on the Personnel General tab. Select this to send an Email Reminder to the person(s) assigned to the Temporary Credential(s). The reminder states: "You were provided a temporary card on <issue date>. Please return the card at your earliest convenience." The <issue date> field is filled in with the appropriate value, and the email is sent to the email address for the current owner as shown on their Personnel screen. If the email cannot be sent, an appropriate error is displayed in the Sending Email Reminders dialog box. This selection can be used with multiple selections, and a failure of one or more selections does not stop the attempt for other selections. Mark Lost Select to mark the Credential(s) as Lost. Adialog box appears to confirm the setting, and the Credential(s) are marked as Lost. Mark Stolen Select to mark the Credential(s) as Stolen. Adialog box appears to confirm the setting, and the Credential(s) are marked as Stolen. 126 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226939 Credential Dynamic View Credential View Context Menu (continued) Selection Description Activate Temporary Select to change the status of Temporary Credential(s) to Activated. A dialog box appears that allows you to set the duration of the Activation. You can enter a number and select whether the number represents Years, Days, or Hours. You can also set the time of day when the Credential(s) will expire. This selection appearsonty for Temporary Credentials. Return Temporary Select to change the status of Temporary Credentials to Unassigned (returning the credential to the pool of Temporary Credentials available to be assigned). NOTE: If the Temporary Credential has an identical name as the Personnel, returning the aedentialchanges its status to Assigned (from Activated). Naming the card identically is assumed to mean that the card should stay with the same-named personnel. This selection appears only for Temporary Credentials. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 127 EFTA01226940 Searching for Credentials Searching for Credentials You can search for Credentials using the Search functions on the Personnel pane. You can perform a Quick Search using the Credential fields on the pane, or you can perform an Advanced search by defining a Query using the Query Editor. Searches are activated by clicking the Search button (Ma). • To show a list of all Credentials, click c s-s., without entering any data in the Quick or Advanced Search panes. • To Quick Search for Credentials, type your search information in the Quick Search pane and click M.6. See Performing a Credential Quick Search on Page 129 for more information. • To perform an Instant Query, click Advanced to show the Advanced pane, then click Instant Query. See Running an Instant Query on Page 31 for more information (the topic shows a Personnel Instant Query, but the principles are the same for Credentials). • To perform an Advanced search, click Advanced to show the Advanced pane, then select a Credential Query from the list and click MAN, as shown in Figure 35 on Page 128. See Defining a Personnel Advanced Search (Query) on Page 33 for more information (the topic shows a Personnel Advanced Query, but the principles are the same for Credentials). The list includes the pre-defined Queries related to Credentials that come with the system. (See Appendix A in the C• CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information.) The list also includes any Queries already defined by an Operator. NOTE Figure 35: CredentialAdvanced Search Pane Personnel *New t. kredentlal MI la . Search Quick Advanced s New Query... p Instant Quay... SWH22 - Credential Expired wOhin Time Range Query SWHrepE2 • Credentials that should be Disabled by Inactivity Quay SWI-ItepS3 - Credentials that have been Disabled by Inactivey Qua SWFIrepeal - Credentials that should be Disabled by Inactivity but xs. el 0 A • To search for Credentials for Personnel based on certain conditions, see Searching for Credentials for Personnel on Page 36. • If you have defined a default Dynamic View for Credentials that includes a Query, click g.a to display that view, showing Personnel that meet the criteria in the Query. See the Chapter on Dynamic Views in the C• CURE 9000 Data Views Guide for more information about default views. 128 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226941 Searching for Credentials Performing a Credential Quick Search To Perform a Credential Quick Search 1. Click the Personnel pane button. The Personnel pane opens with Quick Search visible. 2. Click the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar and select Credential. Personnel • knower Soave Ja￾Eenrerel 73.0e bare Cad Umber Cods inued On a Belay. P" is reeratryGeriered 17 Lott 17 %den ✓ Templati nOrerced 3. En er the Credential information you wish to search for in the Quick Search fields (Personnel Type, Name, Card Number, Status). You can type a full name or a partial name (search for a name that "starts with" the letters you type)• Example: If you type "Smi" in Name you would find "Smith". The Name field can be used to find combinations of last, first, and middle names. 4. You can select Cards Issued On or Before to search for Temporary Credentials issued on that date or before that date. 5. You can select Is Temporary Credential to search for Temporary Credentials. 6. You can select Lost or Stolen to search for Credentials marked Lost or Stolen. 7. You can select Template to search for Credentials that are Templates. NOTE The check mark fields have three states (which cycle each time you click in the check mark): ✓ - Blank means "search for records where this criteria is NOT True. r'; - Checked means "search for records where this criteria IS True". • - Dimmed means "do not use this criteria in the search". C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 129 EFTA01226942 Searching for Credentials Example: If you click so that the Template check box is dimmed Ft ), the search results will show both Template and Non￾Template Credentials. 8. Click Mai to open a Dynamic View showing the Credential objects that match the information you entered. Quick Search Examples for Temporary Credentials The following are examples of ways to use Quick Search with Temporary Credentials. To Find Out How many Temporary Credentials Exist 1. Follow the steps for Performing a Credential Quick Search. 2. Select F Is Temporary Credential and click a t 3. The result will be a Dynamic View listing all Temporary Credentials. To Find Out How Many Temporary Credentials are Assigned to a Personnel Type 1. Follow the steps for Performing a Credential Quick Search. 2. Use the Personnel Type drop-down list to pick a Personnel Type. Example: Select Employee. 3. Select F Is Temporary Credential and click gaig. 4. The result will be a Dynamic View listing all Temporary Credentials that are assigned to Employees. -4= To Find Out How Many Temporary Credentials Have Been Lost or Stolen. 1. Follow the steps for Performing a Credential Quick Search. 2. Select F Lost to search for Lost credentials, or r Stolen to search for Stolen credentials. 3. Select F Is Temporary Credential and click gilt 4. The result will be a Dynamic View listing all Temporary Credentials that are marked Lost or Stolen. To Find Out How Many Temporary Credentials Have not Been Returned After "N" Days I . Follow the steps for Performing a Credential Quick Search. 2. Select F Cards Issued On or Before and click the drop-down arrow to select a date that is "N" days prior to the current date. 3. Select Activated from the Status drop-down list. 4. Select F Is Temporary Credential and click ELS. 5. The result will be a Dynamic View listing all Temporary Credentials that are still activated after "N" days. 130 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226943 Searching for Credentials To Find Out How Many Temporary Credentials are Unassigned and Available to be Assigned 1. Follow the steps for Performing a Credential Quick Search. 2. Select Unassigned from the Status drop-down list. 3. Select I7 Is Temporary Credential and click Q. 4. The result will be a Dynamic View listing all Temporary Credentials that are Unassigned. To find out how many Temporary Credentials are available for each Partition, you can click on the Partition Name column of the Dynamic View and drag it to the Drag Columns to group by here area to sort the Dynamic View results by Partition. — it ...., M. s x . • 6a Z D AL vce 15. Cost 10 L POMM4sw AMOCO _ Nes I GM ..es 1 4x10 Ma I Sum I hada I Mate Donis I towel lot I Aim onom046 1 I MIMS M CSOM Mom: oll 01042011 4/27/201.1014A A r r .W. mo 11103162fl wow Unsom4 Mai 10/7/201111 25AM PI r r mo nobs S 0 MOM Mims/ CE1/09/2011 10/2/2011111 PM P r r L eepaed$10 5722%/2 M Col0M Mimed aM 03/10/2011 9/3/20114MM p r r I Imenal2 31M/4011 GOMM Oeuar DOM 03/10/2014 91/331112431411 P r r I Am Mon I617101421 Coney AASS IMIM innevzon 9/10/201110 02 011 P r r I i nto.211) MoVelito 41 275304249 [MOM MOM MOM osionon 9/10/201110 09 All P r r C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapters 131 EFTA01226944 Credential Editor Credential Editor The Credential editor can be opened from the Personnel pane to let you edit a regular Credential or a Temporary Credential. Regular Credentials are access cards and PINs associated with Personnel records in the system. Temporary Credentials are access cards or PINs that are assigned to Personnel on a Temporary basis. These Credentials can be Assigned to Personnel, Activated for Personnel, or Unassigned (waiting to be assigned). Regular Credentials can ONLY be created from the Personnel editor Credential tab (see Personnel Credentials Tab on Page 54). Temporary Credentials can be created from the Credential editor (see Credential General Tab on Page 134) or using the Personnel editor Credentials tab. See Managing Temporary Credentials on Page 140 for more information about Temporary Credentials. The following sections provide more information about using the Credential Editor. ■ Credential Editor Tabs on Page 132 ■ Credential Tasks on Page 132 Credential Editor Tabs The Credential Editor stores access card information on several tabbed views. The following sections give more information about each Credential editor tab and how to use it. ■ Credential General Tab on Page 134 ■ Credential User-defined Fields Tab on Page 138 ■ Credential Badging Tab on Page 139 Credential Tasks You can perform the following tasks related to one or more Credentials. ■ Accessing The Credential Editor on Page 133 ■ Creating a Temporary Credential on Page 141 ■ Searching for Credentials on Page 128 ■ Using the Credential View Context Menu on Page 125 ■ Personnel Object Tasks on Page 18 ■ Temporary Credential Tasks on Page 140 132 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226945 Accessing The Credential Editor Accessing The Credential Editor You can access the Credential Editor from the C•CURE 9000 Personnel pane. To Access the Credential Editor 1. Click the Personnel pane button in the Administration Station. 2. Select Credential from the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar. 3. Click Mdr to open a Dynamic View showing all Credential objects. 4. Double-click the name of the Credential in the list that you want to edit (or right-click to display the context menu, then click Edit), and the Credential Editor opens. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 133 EFTA01226946 Credential General Tab Credential General Tab The Credential General tab allows you to create/edit Temporary Credentials or edit regular Credentials. The General tab includes the fields that are on the Personnel Credential tab, with the exception of the Credential table that can show multiple Credentials. The Credential editor shows only one Credential at a time. Figure 38: Credential General Tab rl nem CiPonni POO USW 4100€•Cor tk. I ea I tons I Fess •••••1 rola lel Cadmic, c.awc to Ciaminte r... LW IwMM. .141P•A•Ibir Crageoltra fuso•e (Mats r in SJ 000f<mer tr•-- ....i.i [ r WO r4« yalds04.0 linen I r • r Kitlil. [ al F lAwac 1 Meta , =LI fit *Rears. p.-P1•44•••••• i. r rotes= Cnie3 44•4 Martantaken..• Omposeintlessa Credential General Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Credentials General tab are shown in Table 21 on Page 134. Table 21: Credential General Tab Definitions FiekliButton Description Standard Fields Name The Name associated with the Credential: either the name of a Temporary Credential or the name of a Personnel record with which a regular Credential is associated. Partition The Partition in which the Credential resides. Credential ID The sequence number for each Credential is incremented for each Credential for a given person. This value is unique and thus useful for importing Personnel and their credentials. This value is auto-generated and cannot be changed. 134 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226947 Credential General Tab Credential General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Card Number Card Number is a value up to 20 digits in length (with a maximum value of 18446744073709551615). The card number is manually typed in and need not be unique as long as the CHUID of which it is a part of is unique. The card number length maybe limited to less than 20 digits by the CHUID format you are using. Example: A card number of 333 with a facility code of 2 would not conflict with a card number of 333 with a facility code of 3. if the facility code was part of the CHUID.) Three fields are filled in when you type a card number in this field: • The Card Number field in the Credentialsdata grid. • The read only Card Number field. • The read only CHUID Format field. Fora PIN-Ontycredential, the label PIN isdisplayed in the Card N u mbar field. The PIN itself is never displayed in this taw.:, Access Type TheAccess Type for each Credential. The value is set to CardAccess if you clickAdd Card Access or PIN-Only if you click Add Pin Only Access. Facility Code The Facility Code for thecredential, entered manually, which can be up to 9223372036854775807, unless limited by the CHUID Format. Issue Code The Issue Code. usually used to indicate the number of times the credential has been issued. The value can be up to 2147483647, as lim ited by CHUID Format. Issue Date The date a Temporary Credential was Issued to a Person. SMART ID Visible only if a Smart ID CHUID format has been enabled. Represents a 128-bit field used for Smart Card credentials. This field Bread-only unless you select a CHUID format created from the Smart ID CHUID Template (see CHUID Format Overview on Page 168. If you select a Smart ID CHUID format, the values you enter into the Smart ID field are used to populate the CardInt2, Card Int3, and Card Int4 fields, and to generate the read-only CHUID field. Mobile Num￾ber Visible only d the Smart ID Personnel System Variable is enabled, and you add the field to a Personnel View (Personnel Views Editor on Page 182). See the System Variables chapter in the C• CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide tot information about System Variables. The Mobile Number field Bread only. Itsvalue is assigned via an externalenrollment application. Credential Status Bank for a regular Credential. Unassigned. Assigned. or Activated for a Temporary Credential. CHUID Format This field shows the CHUID format chosen for each credential. Click the field and then click El to choose a CHUID format. A Selection dialog boxopens, listing the applicable enabled CHUID formats. For a PIN-Ontycredential, the PIN-Only CHUID format is automatically chosen and cannot be changed. Activation TheActivation Date for thecredential. The time defaults to the time thecredentialwascreated Expiration Defines the Date and Time when this Card is considered expired. For new regular credentials, this is defaulted to the number of years specified in the System Options to be added to the Activation Date Time. Temporary Credential's expire based on the TemporaryCredentialActivation Default system variable. Badge Layout Select the Badge Layout to be used for th is credential from the list of badge layouts in this selection list. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 135 EFTA01226948 Credential General Tab Credential General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description BLE Visible onty if the Smart ID Personnel System Variable is enabled. and you add the field to a PersonnelView (PersonnelViews Editor on Page 182). See the System Variables chapter in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for information about System Variables. T h is check box indicates that this credential can be assigned to a mobile device and read by a Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) Reader. If this box isnot checked, the Credential will not work at the BLE reader. Card Status Lost Use this selection to indicate that a badge has been reported lost. (Not applicable to PIN-Onty credentials.) Stolen Use this selection to indicate that the credential has been reported stolen. Disabled Use this selection to indicate that the badge has been disabled manualtyor by the system. Disabled by Inactivity This read-onty field indicates that the credential was d isabled by the Disable by inactivity process. The process sets both the Disabled by inactivity check box and the Disabled check box to True (V ). If you clear (O) the Disabled check box, the Disabled by Inactivity check box is also deared, and the Disabled by Inactivity date is recalculated to restart with the current date. The Disabled by Inactivity date is also recalculated to restart with the current date if the Lost or Stolen check boxes are cleared. NOTE: For information. see Disabling Credentials for InactivityOverview on Page 26. Expired This check box is set to True( ) when the Expiration date has passed. Temporary T h is check box is set to True w° Jand is read-onty if the Credential is a TemporaryCredential. New Credentialscreated with the Credential editor are always Temporary and cannot be changed to regular Credentials in the Credential editor. With Existing Credentials (both regular and Temporary) created via the Personnel Credentials tab, you can change the Temporary setting, so it is possible to change a Temporary Credential to a regular Credential and vice-versa. However, you cannot change an Unassigned Temporary Credential to a regular Credential. Extended Fields Agency Code Identifies the government agency issuing the credential. System Code Identifies the system in which the card is enrolled and is unique for each site. Credential Series This field isavailable to reflect major system changes. Credential Issue A value that is set to '1' the first time a card is issued, and is incremented by one whenever a replacement card is issued. The code can be up to 20 digits in length. but the usual length in a government card format is 1 digit. HMAC Hash Message Authentication Code. This value is unique for each card record, and iscalculated by smart card readers based on card data, the site key, and the hashing algorithm used by the reader. The HMAC for a card can be different based on the reader type at which the card is presented because different reader manufacturers use different hashing algorithms. Asa result, you may have to configure multiple card records for a given physical card if that card will be used for access at multiple reader types. Set this value to 0 for non-extended cards. CardIntl￾CardInt4 Ca rd Int fields are user-named fieldsprovided for proprietary extended card fieldsthat you may use at your site. 136 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226949 Credential General Tab Credential General Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description CHUID The Card Holder Unique Identifier (CHUID) is a number generated by the system. based on the CHUID Format and the values in other credential fields. The CHUID has an 80-Digit Maximum and a 10-Digit Minimum. It must have an even number of digits. All CHUIDS in the system, regardless of the format used, must have the same length, so CHUIDs using a shorter CHUID Format are padded with Os. PIN Credential PIN PIN (Personal Identification Number) is a number assigned to a cardholder. The cardholder uses th is PIN at keypads when required. Use this field only if your card readers have keypads. This PIN field on the Credentials tab is used for PIN-onty access credentials. If you are using a General PIN, the PIN is displayed on the General tab. Miscellaneous Personnel Identifier A number field usually used in Government extended format access cards. This field is optional and it need not have a unique value. Its maximum size can be 9223372036854775807. It can be included in a CHUID Format, in which case its length maybe limited by the CHUID format. Association Category A number field usually used in Government extended format accesscards. This field isoptional, and it need not have a unique value. Itsmaximum size can be 9223372036854775807. It can be included in a CHUID Format, in which case its length maybe limited by the CHUID format. Organizational Category A number field usually used in Government extended format access cards. Thisfield is optional, and it need not have a unique value. Its maximum size can be 9223372036854775807. It can be included in a CHUID Format. in which case its length maybe limited by the CHUID format. Organizational Identifier A number field usually used in Government extended format access ca rds. This field is optional. and it need not have a unique value. Its maximum size can be 9223372036854775807. It can be included in a CHUID Format, in which case its length maybe limited by the CHUID format. Buttons FLm. __ k-. (Generate a Unique Random Card Number) Clickthisbutton to assign a unique random card number to thiscredential. Thiscard number contains up to the maximum number of digits for the CHUID format chosen for the credential. For example, the defautt 'Card Ony CHUID format generates card numbers with no more than ten digits. Three fields are filled in when Generate Unique Random Card Number is pressed: • The Card Number field in the Credentialsdata grid. • The read onty Card Number field • The read onty CHUID format field This behavior is the same as if a manual entry had been made into the Card Number field of the Credentials data grid. Validate CHUID Uniqueness Clickthisbutton to check whether the CHUID for this Personnel record is unique. Adialog box appears that displays the CHUID and states whether it is vabd (unique) or not. Auto Generate Click this button to generate a unique PIN number for a PIN-Onty credential. When you click the button. a dialog appears to show you the generated PIN. This is the onty time the PIN isdisplayed, so you need to communicate it to the person who will be using the PIN. If you click the button again, a new PIN is generated to replace the previous one. If a person forgets their PIN, you must replace it with a new PIN. The PIN is encrypted when stored in the database, and there is no way to look it up. This button is available only if you are editing a PIN-Ontycredential. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 137 EFTA01226950 CredentialUser-defined Fields Tab Credential User-defined Fields Tab The Credential User-defined Fields tab displays the User-defined fields related to Credentials. This tab initially is blank, but when User-defined fields for Credentials are configured, they are displayed on this tab. All of the User-defined fields for Credentials are auto-arranged on the tab. There is no capability to edit or re-arrange the fields. Figure 37: Credential User-defined Fields Tab ledOre CIStreeall RSV' 4dOKOCOPv Patio, WV/ Eno WASAIA+1“..t I esnl p VEIN Nod= Ina.,•• All AN 138 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226951 Credential Badging Tab Credential Badging Tab The Credential Badging tab displays the badging fields for a single Credential. These fields are also displayed on the Personnel Badging tab, except that the Personnel Badging tab can display field values about all of a person's badges. See Personnel Badging Tab Definitions on Page 77 for definitions of the fields on the Credential Badging tab. For a Temporary Credential, you can use the functions on the Badging tab to configure and print a physical badge to go with the Temporary Credential. Figure 38: Credential 8adging Tab C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 139 EFTA01226952 Temporary Credential Tasks Temporary Credential Tasks You can perform the following tasks with the Credential editor to configure Temporary Credentials. • Managing Temporary Credentials on Page 140 • Creating a Temporary Credential on Page 141 • Assigning a Temporary Credential on Page 142 • Activating a Temporary Credential on Page 143. • Using Temporary Credentials for Anonymous Visits on Page 144 • Emailing Reminders to Return Temporary Credential on Page 145 • Returning a Temporary Credential on Page 146 • Marking a Temporary Credential as Lost or Stolen on Page 147 • Deleting an Object on Page 25 • Searching for Credentials on Page 128. Managing Temporary Credentials You can use Temporary Credentials to manage lost or stolen access cards, and to manage access cards for employees who need temporary access at a site. For information about using Temporary Credentials with Visitor Management, see the C•CURE 9000 Visitor Management Guide. Workflow for Managing Temporary Access Cards The following is an example of a workflow for managing Temporary Credentials. (This is presented only as an example to help a site to formulate its own policy.) Table 22: TemporaryCredentialsWorkflow Action See... Establish a reserve of Temporary Credentials for use when Employees forget or lose their accesscards. Optionally, if you want to assign TemporaryCredentials to anonymous visitors, you can create Personnel records to which you can attach Temporary Credentials and re-use these Personnel records and credentials for subsequent visits. Creating a Temporary Credentialon Page 141 Using TemporaryCredentials for AnonymousVisitson Page 144 Set the Temporary Credentials to expire after a predetermined period, so that un-returned Temporary C redentials cannot be used after that Expiration Date. You can set the Expiration Date and Time when you create the Credential, or when you Activate it. Creating a Temporary Credential on Page 141 Activating a Temporary Credentialon Page 143 Use Quick Search to display a dynamicview of Personnelwhen an employee needs a temporary card. Performing a Personnel Quick Search on Page 30 Right-click on the person and select Assign Temporary Credentials. and select an Unassigned credential from the dialog box that appears. Assigning a Temporary Credentialon Page 142 140 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226953 Temporary Credential Tasks Table 22: TemporaryCredentialsWorkflow (continued) Action See... Emaila reminder to a person with a Temporary Credential when the agreed upon date for returning the credentialapproaches. Right-did< on an activated Credential and select Email Reminder. (Onty available if the person'semal address is entered in their Personnel record.) Emailing Reminders to Return Temporary Credentialon Page 145 When the person returns the card, use Quick search to display a dynamic view of Personnel induding the person. Right-dick on the person and select Return Temporary, and a dialog boxappears toconfirm that the credential has been returned. The Temporary Credential is now Unassigned, and avalable for use by another person. Returning a Temporary Credentialon Page 146 Determine which Personnel have not returned Temporary Credentialsafter the agreed upon period, using the CredentialOuick Search field Cards Issued On or Before (date). Seardling for Credentialson Page 128 If a person has not returned the aedential by an agreed upon date, you can mark the Temporary Credential as Lost or Stolen to prevent its further use. You can also use the Expiration Date setting to expire an un-returned Temporary Credential to prevent its further use. If the Temporary Credential is eventualty returned, you can dear the Lost or Stolen Card Status, or change the Expiration DatefTlme to make the card usable again. Marking a Temporary Credential as Lost or Stolen on Page 147 Creating a Temporary Credentialon Page 141 Creating a Temporary Credential You can create a Temporary Credential using the Credential editor. Note that the Card Status Temporary field is selected and read-only - you can create only Temporary Credentials in this manner. To Create a Temporary Credential 1. Click the Personnel pane button in the Administration Station. 2. Select Credential from the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar. 3. Click New to open the Credential editor. 4. Enter a name for the Credential in the Name field. 5. Fill in the Fields such as Card Number, Facility Code, and Issue Code as needed. 6. Select the CHUID Format for the card. 7. Set the Activation and Expiration Dates to meet your needs. For a Temporary Credential, you may wish to set a short duration, such as 5 days (so that a card that is not returned automatically expires) by making the Expiration Date 5 days after the Activation Date. 8. Click Save and Close to save your settings and close the Credential editor. Alternatively you can choose: • Save and New - Click to save the current Credential and have the Credential editor stay open so that you can create a new credential. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 141 EFTA01226954 Temporary Credential Tasks ■ Save - Click to save all changes to the credential you are editing. The Credential editor remains open. ■ Create Copy - Click to create a copy of the Credential being edited. If you have not saved the original, a prompt is displayed asking whether to save the original before creating a copy of the Credential. The Name, Credential ID, and Card Number fields are blanked, but the values in other fields are retained. Assigning a Temporary Credential You can assign a Temporary Credential to a Personnel record as a temporary replacement for a lost or stolen access card that can be set up with a managed activation time span, and tracked when returned (or not returned). The Assign Temporary Credential context menu selection also activates the credential, so you can assign and activate in one step. When temporary credentials are assigned and activated in this way, the expiration date is set according to the Temporary Credential Activation default (see System Variables for Credentials on Page 148). To Assign Temporary Credentials to a Person 1. Use the Personnel pane Quick Search to find the person's Personnel record on a Personnel Dynamic View. See Performing a Personnel Quick Search on Page 30. 2. Right-click on the person in the Personnel Dynamic View. 3. Select Assign Temporary Credential. A Name Selection dialog box appears. 4. Select a Temporary Credential that is Unassigned from the dialog box. (You can select a Temporary Credential that is Assigned or Activated, but if you do so, a Warning appears stating that the credential will be removed from the person it is currently assigned to if you click OK. Or you can Cancel, and repeat this step to choose a different credential.) Warning The selected temporary credential is assigned to Smith, I\ Samantha. If you continue, it will be removed from their — Credentials and re-assigned to this person. OK Cancel 5. If this person has one or more currently active Credentials, a dialog box appears to let you choose whether to mark one or more of those Credential as Disabled when the new Temporary Credential is added to the Personnel record. Select or clear the check box(es) and click OK, or click Cancel to cancel assigning the temporary Credential. 142 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226955 Temporary Credential Tasks Eyre,' C•eders4 ',elect Al Sala bye oeaW Nano cN ticatat Tapers, • Piohoca to€83746s itnix.sin444 44.1 O.41. babe to sac, Mat abatis' It aryl but a be (label ty he yen Tentwary Cteckta Ot. 6. If needed, you can manually change the Card Status of the now Disabled Credential to Lost or Stolen, and the Lost and Stolen Cards count will be incremented when you save the Personnel record. Activating a Temporary Credential You can activate a Temporary Credential that is Assigned to a person, so that the Credential can be used for access. When you select Activate Credential from the Credential or Personnel Dynamic View context menu, an Activate Temporary Credential dialog box opens to allow you to set the Expiration Time Span (the amount of time the Credential remains active) for the Temporary Credential). Figure 39: Activate Temporary Credential Dialog Box Activate Temporary Credential E 'awn Tme Span Delault On:kola' Expiration Tine r Yea's !len r awe me of Exprthon OK Cancel C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 143 EFTA01226956 TemporaryCredential Tasks The default value for the Expiration Time Span is determined by the system variable Temporary Credential Activation Default. See System Variables for Credentials on Page 148 and the C• CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for more information on System Variables. Table 23: Activate Temporary Credential Field/Button As Description Default Credential Expiration Time Type a number or use the a to raise or lower the value. The maximum allowed activation time for a temporary credential is 5 Years (equivalent to 1825 daysor 43,800 hours). Years. Days. Hours You can set the duration to Years, Days, or Hours. Time of Expiration You can specify the Time of Expiration for the Credential by checking the box and typing in a date or using the E to raise or lower the value. You can only specify the time of expiration if Years or Days is selected. If Hours is selected the ability to specify the time isdisabled. OK When you dick OK, the Temporary Credential isacWated. The Issue Date set to today and the Expiration Date is set to the number of days in the future specified. Cancel If you dick Cancel, the Credential is not modified. Using Temporary Credentials for Anonymous Visits You can use Temporary Credentials to set up access for anonymous Visitors if you do not want to create dedicated Personnel records for these visitors. You can create a pool of Personnel records set aside for anonymous visitors, and re-use them whenever visitors arrive. "MI To Configure Access for Anonymous Visits 1. Prior to visitor arrival, create a number of new Personnel records so that you will have a Personnel record for each visitor. Example: "Anon, Visitor #1", "Anon, Visitor #2", "Anon, Visitor #3". 2. Add the appropriate Clearances to each visitor Personnel record. 3. Use Add Card Access in each visitor Personnel record to create an access card, and set the Card Status to Disabled and Temporary. This ensures that you have a Temporary Credential for each visitor Personnel record, named accordingly, so it is recognizably associated with each visitor Personnel record. The card is disabled so that it cannot be used until activated. Example: "Anon, Visitor #1" has a Credential named "Anon, Visitor #1", etc. 4. Save and Close each visitor Personnel Record. 144 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226957 Temporary Credential Tasks 5. When one or more visitors arrive, issue them the access cards that correspond to the visitor credentials, and use either the Credential or Personnel Dynamic View context menu to Activate Temporary Credential. This removes the Disabled Card Status and makes the cards ready to use. 6. When the visitors return the access cards and leave, use the Credential or Personnel Dynamic View context menu to Return Temporary Credential, changing the Status back to Assigned and Disabled, so that the Credentials are available for subsequent visitors. 7. When new visitors arrive, re-issue the access cards and use (Activate Temporary) to activate the cards for the new visitors. Emailing Reminders to Return Temporary Credential You can Email a reminder to personnel who have Activated or Assigned Temporary Credentials that they need to return their temporary access card. This selection is only available for Personnel records that have an Email address on the Personnel General tab. This selection can be used with multiple selections, and an Email failure of one or more selections does not stop the attempt for other selections. You can also create and schedule an Event to send out Email reminders for Temporary Credentials. See Credentials Event Actions on Page 149for more information. You can use Quick Search for Credentials to show the Temporary Credentials that are Activated and have Cards Issued On or Before a date you specify, identifying the cards that are appropriate for an Email Reminder. The Email Reminder sent to a person assigned to the Temporary Credential states: "You were provided a temporary card on <issue date>. Please return the card at your earliest convenience." The <issue date> field is filled in with the appropriate value, and the email is sent to the email address for the current owner as shown on their Personnel screen. To Send an Email Reminder to Return Temporary Credentials 1. Follow the steps for Performing a Credential Quick Search. 2. Select FCards Issued On or Before and click the drop-down arrow to select a date that is "N" days prior to the current date. 3. Select Activated from the Status drop-down list. 4. Select FIB Temporary Credential and click RS . 5. The result will be a Dynamic View listing all Temporary Credentials that are still activated after "N" days. 6. Select the rows in the Dynamic View to which you want to send an Email Reminder. 7. Right-click and select one or more rows in the list and choose Email Reminder. 8. The Sending Email Reminder dialog box appears to confirm that Email was sent, or listing the personnel to whom a reminder could not be sent. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 145 EFTA01226958 TemporaryCredenbalTasks Serbdono [mail Animates Done :ening f ertmay CtetheVill Remora Pererite: tucce::1,4 1 bee n no cm,' S Roy, Reims, seen:ant could not be sent hate n no cm,: S tame. Maas so a mender cSd re be sent Pre Returning a Temporary Credential You can return an Activated Temporary Credential, making it Unassigned and available to be assigned to another Personnel record. You would perform this action when the person assigned this Temporary Credential no longer needs it. ■ The person is an employee who lost their access card, and needed a Temporary Credential until their card was replaced. ■ (For Visitor Management only) The person is a visitor who was assigned a Temporary Credential during a visit, and has finished the visit (no longer needs an access card). To Return a Temporary Credential from the Credential Dynamic View 1. Click the Personnel pane button in the Administration Station. 2. Select Credential from the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar. 3. Select the Is Temporary Credential check box in the Quick Search panel. 4. Click ai m to open a Dynamic View showing all Temporary Credentials. 5. Select the Temporary Credential you wish to return to Unassigned Status. 6. Right-click to open the context menu and select Return Temporary. To Return a Temporary Credential from the Personnel Dynamic View 1. Click the Personnel pane button in the Administration Station. 2. Select Personnel from the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar. 3. Enter the person's name (full or partial) in the Quick Search panel. 4. Click Esi to open a Dynamic View showing all Personnel that match the Quick Search criteria. 5. Select the person whose Temporary Credential you wish to return to Unassigned Status. 6. Right-click to open the context menu and select Return Temporary. 148 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226959 TemporaryCredentialTasks Marking a Temporary Credential as Lost or Stolen You mark a Temporary Credential as either Lost or Stolen, making it unavailable to be assigned or activated for access. You would perform this action when the person assigned this Temporary Credential: ■ Reports the Temporary Credential Lost or Stolen. ■ Has not returned a Temporary Credential by the agreed upon date. A Lost or Stolen credential that is used in an attempt to gain access will be rejected. To Mark a Temporary Credential Lost or Stolen from the Credential Dynamic View 1. Click the Personnel pane button in the Administration Station. 2. Select Credential from the drop-down list in the Personnel pane toolbar. 3. Select the Is Temporary Credential check box in the Quick Search panel. 4. Click Oda to open a Dynamic View showing all Temporary Credentials. 5. Select the Temporary Credential you wish to mark as Lost or Stolen Status. 6. Right-click to open the context menu and select either Lost or Stolen. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle Chapter 5 147 EFTA01226960 System Variablesfor Credentials System Variables for Credentials Several System Variables in the Personnel category have an effect on Credentials. See the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for more information on these System Variables. Maximum Cards Per Person This system variable lets you set the number of cards that you can add to a single person record. The number must be between 1 and 5. Temporary Credential Activation Default This system variable defines the default in days that a newly activated Temporary Credential remains active. When you activate a Temporary Credential, you can choose to change this default on the Activate Temporary Credential dialog box. See Activating a Temporary Credential on Page 143. Timespan of Expiration This system variable allows you to specify the time period past the creation date to use for the default expiration date of a new credential. The Default Credential Expiration Time is expressed in Years, Days, or Hours. When Years or Days is selected, you can specify the Time of Expiration - the time of day that Expiration occurs. Example: If you set the Default Credential Expiration Time to 5 Years and the Time of Expiration at 230 PM, a Credential you create will by default expire after 5 Years, at 230 PM. You can change the Timespan of Expiration for a Temporary Credential when you activate it (see Activating a Temporary Credential on Page 143). You can also change the default Timespan of Expiration for a Personnel Type by editing it (see Personnel Type Overview on Page 100). Extend Maximum Cards Per Person This system variable, if set to True, specifies that Credentials with a status of Lost, Stolen, or Disabled do not count against the limit set by the system variable Maximum Cards Per Person. For example, if a Person has 2 active Credentials and 3 Lost Credentials on a system with a Maximum Cards Per Person limit of 3, one more Credential could be added to the Personnel record. If False, all Credentials count against the limit set by the system variable Maximum Cards Per Person. 148 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226961 Credentials Evenl Acton& Credentials Event Actions The following actions for managing Temporary Credentials are available for configuration in Events. Mark Unreturned Temporary Credentials Lost This action is used to automate the process of marking un-returned Temporary Credentials as Lost. Credentials marked Lost through this action are treated by C•CURE 9000 as if they were marked Lost in the Personnel editor. You can create an Event and schedule it to run periodically to invoke this action. The action has a field called Number of unreturned days that you can set so that any Temporary Credential that has been Assigned or Activated but not returned after that many days is considered lost. Marking a Temporary Credential as Lost disables the credential and makes it useless for accessing the site. When activated, this action searches for all Temporary Credentials that have not been returned for Number of unreturned days (or longer), and marks each as Lost. The Personnel record's Lost Credentials count is incremented by this action. Mark Unreturned Temporary Credentials Stolen This action is used to automate the process of marking un-returned Temporary Credentials as Stolen. This action functions identically to Mark Unreturned Temporary Credentials Lost, except it marks the Temporary Credential as Stolen instead of Lost. This action gives an additional option for handling un-returned credentials. If marked as Stolen, the Temporary Credentials are not removed from the Personnel record. Email Reminders for Unreturned Temporary Credentials 'Ibis action is used to automate the process of sending email reminders for un-returned Temporary Credentials. The action has a field called Number of unreturned days, which is the number of days that the Temporary Credential has been assigned and not returned. The action locates each Temporary Credential that has not been returned past the specified number of days and sends an email to the email address associated with the assigned Personnel record reminding them to return the credential. If a Personnel record does not have an associated email address, no email can be sent. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 5 149 EFTA01226962 Credentials Event Actions 150 Chapter 5 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226963 6 Custom Clearance A Custom Clearance is a clearance that gives unique access, individualized by person, to Doors/Door Groups and Elevators/Elevator Groups. Custom Clearances are configured from a Custom Clearance tab in the C•CURE 9000 Personnel Editor. The Custom Clearance View allows you to view a list of all Custom Clearances in the system, and sort, filter and group the list. You can then open the Personnel Editor to edit the Personnel record that contains a given Custom Clearance. In this chapter Custom Clearance View 152 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 6 151 EFTA01226964 Custom Clearance \hew Custom Clearance View The Custom Clearance selection from the Personnel pane lets you display a Dynamic View that lists all Custom Clearances in the system. Custom Clearances are unique individualized clearances for Doors/Door Groups and Elevators/Elevator Groups that are associated with specific Personnel records in the system. Tasks that you can perform using the Custom Clearance View are explained in Custom Clearance Tasks on Page 152. The Custom Clearance View shows the columns listed by default in Table 24 on Page 152. You can right-click a column heading to choose additional columns to display. Table 24: Custom Clearance View Definitions Columns Description Personnel Name The full name of the person who owns this Custom Clearance. Access Type This oolu mn displays the type of access each Custom Clearance gives—whether Door, Door Group, Elevator, or Elevator Group. Clearance Item Name Displays the name of the Custom Clearance. Schedule Name Displays the name of the schedule during which this Clearance gtvesaccess. NOTE: In an Enterprise Environment, the Partition Name column also displays by default. It shows the Partition that the Custom Clearance belongs to—whether Global or a specific local partition on the SAS. NOTE One of the additional columns you can choose to display is 'Name'. It displays a system￾generated name for the Custom Clearance that is used on the Privilege Editor Exceptions tab. Example: CC45001-376064978) Custom Clearance Tasks You can perform the following task related to one or more Custom Clearances. ■ Personnel Object Tasks on Page 18 ■ You can also have expired Custom Clearances removed from a person's record by creating an Event with a Remove Expired Custom Clearance from Personnel Action. For information, see Removing an Expired Custom Clearance from a Personnel Record on Page 153 Using the Custom Clearance View Context Menu The Custom Clearance View context menu opens when you right-click on one or more Custom Clearances in the Dynamic View of Custom Clearances. 152 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226965 Custom Clearance View You can select one or more Custom Clearances in the Dynamic View (using multiple selection combinations such as SHIFf+Left-click and CTRL+Left-click) and perform one of the following functions supported on the Custom Clearance View context menu: Edit, Set Property, Export Selection, Find in Audit Log, and Delete. See Using the Object List Context Menu on Page 23 for information about using the context menu. Removing an Expired Custom Clearance from a Personnel Record You can create Events with a Remove Expired Custom Clearance from Personnel Action to delete Custom Clearances with expired date/times from Personnel records. This allows you to automatically clean up expired Custom Clearances from peoples records. The Event can be configured to run either on a schedule or on demand. NOTE In an Enterprise Environment, Custom Clearances assigned to a: • Global Personnel record are always global. • Local Personnel record are always local. Consequently, to remove them you must create the following: • A separate Event at each local SAS to remove an expired Local Custom Clearance. • An Event on the MAS to remove an expired Global Custom Clearance. To Create an Event to Remove Expired Custom Clearances 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Client, click Configuration to open the Configuration pane and select Event from the pane drop-down list. 2. Click New to open the Event Editor. 3. Give the Event an appropriate name and description and enable it.. 4. Configure it as you wish on the General, Options and other Event Editor tabs. For information, see "Configuring an Event" in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. Example: • On the General tab, you can ann the Event, set its Priority, and create a Schedule for it. • On the Options tab, you can choose to have any Event state changes sent to the Journal and/or Monitoring Station and require the Event to be acknowledged. 5. On the Event Action tab, click Add to create a new Action for the Event. • In the Action field, click the down-arrow and scroll down to select Remove Expired Custom Clearance from Personnel from the list. 6. Click Save and Close to accept the selections you have made and save the Event. Or Click Save and New to accept the selections you have made, save the Event, and keep the Event Editor open to create another Event. - or - Click Cancel to discard your selections. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 6 153 EFTA01226966 Custom Clearance View 154 Chapter 6 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226967 7 Images The Images Editor in C•CURE 9000 lets you import, name and store images that you want to use as dynamic images on badge layouts. In this chapter Images Editor 156 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle Chapter 7 155 EFTA01226968 Images Editor Images Editor The Images editor selection from the Personnel pane lets you import, name and store images that you want to use as dynamic images on badge layouts. Tasks that you can perform using the Images Editor are explained in Images Tasks on Page 156. Definitions for Images Editor fields and button are covered in Images Definitions on Page 159. When you display a Dynamic View that lists all images, the list includes the following three types of Images: Table 25: Personnel Image Types Image Type 1 Description System These images are used byC•CURE9000and cannot be modified or deleted. Dynamic Badge Image These are images that you have imported from fees using the Images Editor. See Importing an Image on Page 156. Portrait These are images that you imported or captured on the Personnel Images tab to use as badge portraits. Images Tasks You can perform the following task related to Images. ■ Personnel Object Tasks on Page 18 ■ Importing an Image on Page 156 Importing an Image You can import images into the C•CURE 9000 database for use with badges and Personnel records. After you import an image, you can add it as a dynamic image to a badge layout, and then print a badge that uses that image. To Import an Image 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select Images from the Personnel pane drop-down list. 3. Click New to create a new Image object. The Images Editor opens (see Figure 40 on Page 157). 156 Chapter? C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226969 Images Editor Figure 40: linagesEditer 'mar. Er- J 4 iv. and Cbie SIP 110Ale Pet New PSIS War TV& ImsgekradlOalic Dimwit Botelar 7n5/100B7:N:53PM ISO WOO 4. In the Name field, type a name for the Image object. 5. In the Description field, type a textual description that will help to identify this object. 6. Click Import Image. The Import Image dialog box appears (see Figure 41 on Page 158). C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 7 157 EFTA01226970 Images Editor Figure 41: Import Image Dialog Box Image t on Image Into Selected help • —1 C • D E • —I Load Imago Win, in peeekt Height in pbcelx Type of file: Odentabon Q• 0 elegises O 90 Otpite5 le0 demos O 270 demos CJANI 7. Click the Image Selection tree to navigate to the file you want to import. 8. Click the image file you want to import, and a preview of the image file appears. 9. Click one of the Orientation options to rotate the image, if desired. 10. Click Load Image. The Save Image dialog box opens (see Figure 42 on Page 158). Figure 42: Save Image Dialog Box 158 Chaptet 7 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226971 Images Editor 11. You can use the cropping selection box to select the portion of the image to import. You can resize the cropping selection box by clicking and dragging any of the box's corners. 12. Click Save to save the image. The image appears in the Image area on the Image Editor. 13. Click Save and Close to save the imported image. Adding a Dynamic Image to a Badge Layout To add an imported image to a badge as a Dynamic Image (a graphic on the badge that can be varied on a per badge basis), you need to import the image, name the image, enter the image name into a customer field in one or more Personnel records, and specify that customer field as the source for the dynamic image in the badge layout. To Add a Dynamic Image to a Badge Layout 1. Import an Image (see Importing an Image on Page 156) and save the image with a Name. For this example, name the image "Badge Image". 2. Launch the C•CURE ID Badge Designer. See Badge Layout Editor on Page 162. 3. Drag the Image icon to the badge layout and position the image object where you want it on your badge layout. 4. In the Image Pruurssing Panel, click Dynamic Filename, and select a customer field (Text 1 - Text11) to be the source for the Dynamic Image. For example, choose Text2 to be the field you will use for dynamic images. 5. For each Person's badge that you want the image to appear on, use the Personnel Editor (see Personnel Editor on Page 37) to edit the text field and type in the name of the imported image object that you saved. For this example, type in Badge Image. 6. Click Save and Close to save the Personnel record. 7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each badge that you want to include a dynamic image. 8. On the Personnel Editor Badging tab, click Preview Badge to view a preview of the badge to make sure the dynamic image appears correctly. Images Definitions This section defines the fields and buttons on the Images Editor. Table 26: Images Definitans Field/Button Description Name Type a name for the image that you are importing. Description Type a descsiption that will help you identify this image or its intended usage. Image Type The type of image that is being stored. Currently all stored imagesare Dynamic Badge Images. Partition A read-onty field displaying the partition to which this Image belongs. This field is visible only d the C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned. Name of Person If this image isa Portrait that you captured or imported on the Personnel Images tab, the person to which you assigned this image is ksted. This is a read-onty field. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 7 159 EFTA01226972 Images Editor Images Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Image Import Date Displays the date and time that this image was most recentty saved after being imported. This field is read-onty and is updated by the system if you re-import a new image into this image object. Image Size Displays the size of the image. Measurements are width x height in pixels, uncompressed size in bytes, and compressed size in bytes. Example: If the Image Size field displays: 300 x 244 ( 219600 [12042)) This means the images is: • 300 pixelswide • 244 pixels high • 219.600 bytes uncompressed • 12.042 bytes compressed Image Displays an image after you import it using the Import Image button. Import Image This button opens the Import Image dialog box so you can select an image from a local or nehvork drive, and make adjustments to it. See Importing an Image on Page 156 for more information. Save and New ClickSave and New when you havecompleted any changes to the image and wish to save those changes, and you want to create a new Image. The Image you were editing is saved. and a new Imageopens(aiths( blankor including template information if you were using a template to create new Images). Save and Close Click Save and Close when you havecompleted any changes to a Card Format and wish to save those changes. Close when you want to close the Card Format Editor without saving your changes. A prompt appears so that you can choose to continue editing or close the editor. Click OK to close the editor without saving changes, or click Cancel to continue editing the Image. IX Click 160 Chapter 7 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226973 8 Badge Layout This chapter explains how to create badge layouts for access cards in C•CURE 9000 Personnel. In this chapter Badge Layout Editor 162 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 8 161 EFTA01226974 Badge Layout Editor Badge Layout Editor A Badge Layout is an object that specifies a badge design created using the C•CURE ID Badge Designer, and allows the design to be assigned to a badge credential in a Personnel record. The badge layout also allows you to assign up to three card formats for Magmnetic Stripe Encoding, if your access credentials use mag encoding. The sections provide more information about using the Badge layout Editor to define Badge layouts. ■ Badge Layout Tasks on Page 162 ■ Badge Layout Definitions on Page 165 Badge Layout Tasks You can perform the following tasks with the Badge layout Editor. ■ Personnel Object Tasks on Page 18 ■ launching the Badge Designer on Page 162 ■ Creating a Badge layout on Page 163 ■ Setting Card Formats for Mag Stripe Encoding on Page 164 Launching the Badge Designer You use the C•CURE ID Badge Designer to create a badge layout, and to edit an existing badge layout. To Launch the Badge Designer 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select Badge Layout from the Personnel pane drop-down list. 3. Click to open a Dynamic View listing all Badge layout objects. 4. Right-click the Badge layout in the list that you wish to edit, and click Edit. The Badge layout Editor opens (see Figure 43 on Page 163). 162 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226975 Badge Layout Editor Figure 43: Badge Layout Editor ElBadge Layout - a say..arA ME© 04n.} arrl is. 11`, Creohte rnnv De:cot:43n I PatRim Bldg 1 Launch C CURE ID Sedge Demi', 5. Click Launch C•CURE ID Badge Designer to open the C•CURE ID Badge Designer. (See Figure 44 on Page 164). Creating a Badge Layout You can create a new Badge Layout for use with C•CURE ID Badging on C•CURE 9000. A Badge Layout specifies the badge design that can be assigned to a badge credential in a Personnel record. The badge design is created using the C•CURE ID Badge Designer. The badge layout also allows you to assign up to three card formats for Magnetic Stripe Encoding, if your access credentials use mag encoding. You can also create a Badge Layout template if you want to create multiple badge designs based on the same badge properties (such as badge orientation, badge dimensions, background images, Mag Encoding Options, and number of sides). See Creating an Object Template on Page 18. Example: If you want to create a badge with a corporate logo, but have variants of the design for day shift employees, night shift employees, temporary employees, and security personnel, you could create a badge template with the basic design, and then create additional badge layouts using the template as a basis, but with a different color background for each of the badge types. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 8 183 EFTA01226976 Badge Layout Editor To Create a Badge Layout 1. Create a Badge Layout object (see Creating an Object on Page 18). 2. To create a badge design (the actual layout of fields and graphics on an access card) click Launch CCURE ID Badge Designer. 3. The C•CURE ID Badge Designer appears. (See Figure 44 on Page 164.) Figure 44: C•CURE ID Badge Designer C CURL DOedge Designer EN (A k' *co se. Lei> i Li A Li; h °I . . .Hid. ■ Stole in X•Ov•OW•OH•0 -.•Is• Lew. Nnetce4.3010*^, SO, Ontatata 0 j OLV-3 O L) ou Lemon., •.« mask tl .ern 3n atw oxcd.' ;TO:libel n • rn. ****** Vain • •••••••••••• 4. If you have specified Magnetic Stripe encoding on the badge design, you can assign card formats to the badge layout. Otherwise Card Format 1, Card Format 2, and Card Format 3 are unavailable. See Setting Card Formats for Mag Stripe Encoding on Page 164 for more information. 5. To save your new Badge layout, click Save and Close. Alternatively, if you want to save the Badge layout and then create a new one, click Save and New. The current Badge layout is saved and closed, but the Badge layout Editor remains open to allow you to create a new Badge layout. Setting Card Formats for Mag Stripe Encoding If your access badges use Magnetic Stripe Encoding for access or other purposes, you need to specify how many Magnetic Tracks are encoded on each badge, and which format each track represents. To accomplish this, you need to do the following: ■ From the Badge Designer, define the number of magnetic tracks on the badge design. ■ From the Badge Layout Editor, specify the Card Formats for each track on the Badge layout. 184 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukie EFTA01226977 Badge Layout Editor To Set Card Formats for Mag Stripe Encoding I. In the C •CURE ID Badge Designer, specify the Magnetic Stripe encoding options you wish to use. You can specify either two magnetic tracks or three magnetic tracks, and the data that is encoded on each track. 2. Save your badge design and exit the C•CURE ID Badge Designer. You are returned to the Badge Layout Editor. 3. For each magnetic track that you defined on the badge design, select a card format for the data to be encoded on that magnetic track. Click Ej for the card format you want to specify, and select a Card Format from the selection dialog box that appears. (Only Card Formats that are valid for magnetic stripe encoding are listed. If the list is empty, you need to create or modify a Card Format to support magnetic stripe encoding. See the C•CURE 9000 Card Formats and Smart Card Keys Guide for information.) 4. To save your Badge Layout, click Save and Close. Badge Layout Definitions This section defines the fields and buttons on the Badge Layout Editor General tab. Table 27: Badge Layout Editor Definitions Field/Button Description Name Type a name for the badge layout. Each badge layout must have a unique name. Desorption Type a text description for the Badge Layout. This description is visible in the Dynamic View list of Badge Layouts. so it can be useful in distinguishing one badge layout from another. Launch C•CURE ID Badge Designer Click this button to open the C•CURE ID Badge Designer application. so that you can design the specific layout of a badge. Partition A read-only field displaying the partition to which this Badge Layout belongs. This field is visible only d the C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned. Card Format 1 Specifies the card format used for encoding the magnetic stripe on the card. if used. If you have specified a magnetic card stripe as part of your badge design in the C•CURE ID Badge Designer. you can dick to pick a card format for Magnetic Stripe 1. If you are not using Magnetic Stripe encoding. this selection is unavaiable. Card Format 2 Specifies the card format used for encoding the magnetic stripe on the card. if used. If you have specified a magnetic card stripe as part of your badge design in the C•CURE ID Badge Designer, you can dick to pick a card format for Magnetic Stripe 2. If you are not using Magnetic Stripe encoding. this selection is unavaiable. Card Format 3 Specifies the card format used for encoding the magnetic stripe on the card. if used. If you have specified a magnetic card stripe as part of your badge design in the C • CURE ID Badge Designer. you can did< to pidta card format for Magnetic Stripe 3. If you are not using Magnetic Stripe encoding, this selection is unavailable. Save and Close Click Save and Close when you have completed any changes to a Badge Layout and wish to save those changes. Save and New Click Save and New when you have completed any changes to the Badge Layout and wish to save those changes, and you want to create a new Badge Layout. The Badge Layout you were editing is saved. and a new Badge Layout opens. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 8 165 EFTA01226978 Badge Layout Editor Badge Layout Editor Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Create Copy Click Create Copy to create a new Badge Layout object that includes all of the elements of the Badge Layout and the associated Badge Design. For example. the copied object will have the same Height. Width. Orientation, Card Formats. Captions, etc. as the original Badge Layout. Fill in a unique Badge Layout Name and dick Save and Close to save the new Badge Layout. Click Close when you want to close the editor without saving your changes. A prompt appears so that you can choose to continue editing or dose the editor. Click OK to close the editor without saving changes, or dick Cancel to continue editing the Badge Layout. 17 166 Chapter 8 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226979 9 CHUID Format This chapter explain how to edit, enable, and validate CHUID Formats. In this chapter CHUID Format Overview 168 CHUID Format Editor 171 Viewing a List of CHUID Formats 177 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gulls Chapter 9 167 EFTA01226980 CHUID Format Overview CHUID Format Overview C•CURE 9000 provides eleven Card Holder Unique Identifier (CHUID) format templates. You can create additional CHUID formats by modifying the existing format templates to meet your needs. (CardOnly CHUID format cannot be modified.) Each of these format templates is provided to support a different card type and usage. For example, the Card-Facility￾Issue CHUID is provided to support legacy ISC Controller access cards. Similarly, the Govemment-HMAC CHUID is intended for sites that need to include an HMAC (Hash Message Authentication Code) in the cardholder identifier. Depending on the requirements your site has for access credentials, you can use one or more of these formats, and you can modify the formats you use - as long as those formats can be validated to guarantee that the resulting credentials are unique on the C•CURE 9000 system. To use a CHUID format in your Personnel records, that CHUID format must be enabled. By default, only the CardOnly CHUID format is enabled. Because C•CURE 9000 uses a Card Reader format to interpret the raw data read from an access card, you should create a Card Reader format for each CHUID format you enable. You can then assign the Card Reader format to all readers that you expect to read access cards that use a particular CHUID format. for more information on Card Reader formats, see the C•CURE 9000 Card Formats and Smart Card Keys User Guide. To use a different format, you need to open the CHUID Format Editor and create a CHUID format from one of the templates. NOTE When you make changes to a CHUID format, the C•CURE 9000 Hardware Drivers should not be running; changes to the CHUIDs in Personnel records can force a download of card records to the hardware controllers, and this is not desirable during normal operations. See Applying a CHUID Format to Existing Credentials on Page 174. If you plan to modify a CHUID format, it is best to do so before credentials are added to Personnel records because Credentials significantly lengthen the conversion time (if more than 20,000 credentials exist in the system). See Table 28 on Page 168 for more information on the CHUID Format templates. Table 28: CHUID Formats Format Field (Length) CHUID Length Notes Card Only CardNumber (10) 10 The format itself Isread•ony. You can change the Name and Description fieldsof the Format but notdata fields, length, or positions. Card Only64 Template CardNumber (20) 20 Card Only 64-bit Unique Identifier template. Card•Fadity-Issue Template CardNumber (10) FacilityCode (4) IssueCode (4) 18 ThIsCHUID format is intended to support ISC Controllers. 168 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226981 CHUID Format Overview CHUID Formats (continued) Format Field (Length) CHUID Length Notes Government Card Template Card Number (6) Agency Code (4) System Code (4) Credential Series (1) Credential Issue (1) 16 Card Only 64 Template CardNumber (20) 20 Card Only 32-bit Unique Identifier template. Card-Facility Template CardNumber (10) FacilityCode (4) 14 This CHUID Format is read-only. PIN-Only Template CardNumber (10) 10 The format itself is read-only. You can change the Name and Description fields of the Format but not data fields. length, or positions. Government-HMAC Template CardNumber(6) AgencyCode(4) SystemCode (4) CredentialSeries (1) Credentiallssue (1) HMAC (10) 26 Intended for sites that need to include an HMAC (Hash Message Authentication Code) in the cardholder identifier. Extended Format Any Fields Between 10 and 80. This format is the basso( user-created CHUID formats and the templatesother than Ca rdOn ty. Pin Only, and Card Only 64. C•CURE 9000 Personnel ConfigutatIon Guide Chapter 9 169 EFTA01226982 CHUID Format Overview CHUID Formats (continued) Format Field (Length) CHUID Length Notes Full FASC￾N CHUID Format (200 bit) Template CardNumber(6) AgencyCode(4) SystemCode (4) CredentialSeries (1) Credentiallssue (1) Personnel Identifier (10) Association Category (1) Organizational Category (1) Organizational Identifier (4) 32 This Smartcard format is used by 200 bit TWIC/PIV II (Transportation Worker Identification Credential/Personal Identity Verification) cards. PIV II CHUID Format (75 bit) Template Card Number (6) Agency Code (4) System Code (4) 14 This Smartcard format is used to represent the GSA CHUID Format used by PIV II (Personal Identity Verification) cards. PIV-I CHUID Format (128-bit) Template Card Number (40) Cardlntl (20) CardInt2 (20) 80 This Smartcard format is used to represent the GSA CHUID Format used by PIV-I (Personnel Identity Verification) cards. SmartID 128 Template CardInt2 (15) CardInt3 (15) CardInt4 (10) 40 The Smart ID Credential field is a single 128-bit field. The Smart ID value is divided by the system into the CardInt2, CardInt3, and CardInt4 fields, which make up the Smart ID 128 CHUID format.. This CHUID formats used to meet the requirements of F IPS 201. CardInt2 is the Most Significant Bit (MSB), while CardInt2 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB). • CardInt2 s48 bits (15 MSB digits) • CardInt3 s48 bits (15 digits) • CardInt4 is 32 bits (10 LSB digits) This format can onty be used if the Smart ID Mode System Variables set to 1. See the System Variableschapter in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide. 170 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226983 CHUID Format Editor CHUID Format Editor The CHUID Format Editor allows you to edit and enable any or all of the CHUID formats that are included with C•CURE 9000, and to customize these formats to meet your site's needs. The CHUID Format Editor is shown in Figure 45 on Page 171. Figure 45: CHUID Format Editor a ie.* and Close it' create Copy Homo CI Peoullaktl: Cod 0rt* 32 Be Was kinds &SS urn CHUID LOTO CRUD Fame Type Cars Only H Uee this n lo6cochw Suomi CIVIC* in Journal CHUID Relit *2 Add re &move thValidate fields y Move up # Move Down kg, ant MCI Foote to croardale mug be SKS °IUD Fat Cheek "tether tie charge well be valid *Poly Has CHUID Fennel ■ See the CHUID Format Overview on Page 168 for more information about CHUID formats in C•CURE 9000. ■ See CHUID Format Editor Definitions on Page 177 for definitions of the CHUID Editor Fields and Buttons. ■ See CHUID Format Fields on Page 179 for the list of fields that can be included in a CHUID Format. ■ See CHUID Format Tasks on Page 171 for the tasks you can perform using the CHUID Format editor. CHUID Format Tasks You can perform the following tasks with the CHUID Format Editor. ■ Creating and Enabling a CHUID Format on Page 172 ■ Editing a CHUID Format on Page 173 ■ Checking a CHUID Format on Page 174 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 9 171 EFTA01226984 CHUID Format Editor ■ Applying a CHUID Format to Existing Credentials on Page 174 Creating and Enabling a CHUID Format ■ A CHUID Format should be created from a template (to avoid creating an invalid format) and enabled to be used in Personnel records. ■ The CardOnly CHUID format is enabled by default. ■ You can create additional CHUID formats from scratch (not recommended) or from the templates and enable them if you need them. To Create a CHUID Format from a Template 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select CHUID Formats from the Personnel pane drop-down list. 3. Click New to create a new CHUID Format from scratch, or click the drop-down arrow on the New button to choose a Template to base your CHUID Format on. NOTE New from Template is the preferred method for creating a CHUID format, to minimize potential errors. ..:: New • itHUID canal Template --Tempi:nes Card Onag Templets Catelf mistime Template Gereemmem Template CamS Onty 61 Templets Celd.f pokey Templets Gcmmmem.HINAC Template pp/ Only Template MSC .14 CI Fawwt 000 bit) Template PHI CHIAD Format (75 We TemPlate NV I CHM Femme 11284i0 Tantnate 4. Type in a Name and Description for this CHUID Format. 5. Click Enabled to Enable the CHUID Format. 6. Select (1:8 Use this format to decipher unknown CHUIDs in Journal if you want C•CURE 9000 to interpret card swipes by unknown cards using this CHUID format, so that the resulting Journal entry is more useful. See Personnel Credentials Tab Definitions on Page 55 for more information. 7. Click Add to add fields to the CHUID Format. 8. To remove a field from the CHUID Fields table, click the row selector ► to select one or more CHUID format field rows (hold down SHIFT or Ctrl to select multiple rows), then click Remove to delete the row for this field. This button is unavailable when no rows exist, or no rows are selected. 9. To change fields that are currently in the CHUID Format, click the drop-down arrow in the Held Name column and select a new field from the list. 10. Set the Field Length (this will adjust the Start Position and End Position for the field). 11. Repeat steps 6 through 9 as needed for additional fields. 172 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226985 CHUID Format Edda,' 12. When you have completed all modifications and additions, click Validate Fields to validate the CHUID format fields before saving your changes to the format. 13. Click Save and Close. If the CHUID Format is longer than all existing ones, a dialog box appears to warn you about the effects of changing a CHUID format. Figure 46: Save Warning for CHUID Format Are you cure you want to save the I 111111)1(nm:it This change walcause fJ dam-bads to the iStai prat Wwwae the waxen chuid ayngth has <Ind from 10 to IS. Thy can tae a king time. Are you sue that you want to mate this <have≥ 14. Click OK to confirm enabling the CHUID Format, or Cancel to cancel the process. Editing a CHUID Format After you save a CHUID format, subsequently you can only modify the Name, Description, and Enabled flag if you edit the format. Instead you can use the Create a Copy button to create a new CHUID format using the same settings as an existing CHUID format. You can edit this copy to make any changes, and then if desired, apply the new CHUID format to all records that currently use an existing CHUID format. Modifying a CHUID Format by Creating a Copy NOTE You cannot modify the fields and format length of a CHUID Format after you have saved it. If you need to modify a CHUID Format after saving it, you need to create a copy of the Format, using Create a Copy, modify the copy, and then apply the new CHUID Format in place of the existing one. To Modify a CHUID Format 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select CHUID Formats from the Personnel pane drop-down list. 3. Click Ma to open a Dynamic View listing all CHUID Format objects. 4. Select the CHUID format that you want to modify from the list. 5. Double-click the CHUID format to edit it (or right-click and choose Edit from the context menu). The CHUID Format Editor opens. 6. Click Create Copy to make a copy of the existing CHUID format. 7. You can name the CHUID Format by typing in the Name field. 8. You can modify the Description of the CHUID Format by typing in the Description field. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 9 173 EFTA01226986 CHUID Format Editor 9. You can select the Enabled flag to make the CHUID Format available for assignment to Personnel records. Or you can clear the field if you do not want the CHUID Format Enabled. (If a CHUID Format is currently assigned to one or more Personal records, you cannot clear this field.) 10. You can click Add to add a field to the CHUID format. A new row appears in the CHUID Fields table. 11. Select a field for the row from the Held Name drop-down list. 12. Type in the field length of the field into the Length column. 13. To remove a field from the CHUID Fields table, click the row selector I to select one or more CHUID format field rows (hold down SHIFT or Ctrl to select multiple rows), then click Remove to delete the row for this field. This button is unavailable when no rows exist, or no rows are selected. 14. You can change the position of a field in the CHUID Format by using the Move Up button to move the field's row up in the table, or use the Move Down button to move the field's row down in the table. 15. You can change the Length of an existing field by typing the length into the Length field. 16. Click Save and Close to save your changes. If the CHUID Format is longer than all existing ones, a dialog box appears to warn you about the effects of changing a CHUID format. See Figure 46 on Page 173. 17. Click OK to confirm enabling the CHUID Format, or Cancel to cancel the process Applying a CHUID Format to Existing Credentials You can replace an existing CHUID Format for all existing Credentials assigned that CHUID Format. You use the Apply this CHUID Format button to replace the existing CHUID Format in all Credentials using that CHUID Format. You can use the Check whether this change will be valid button to learn if any Credentials will fail to be changed to the new CHUID Format, prior to attempting to apply the new Format. You can then examine these Credentials to determine if you can modify them to work with the new CHUID Format. If a Credential during the Apply this CHUID Format process, the Credential retains its current CHUID. You can perform the following CHUID Format tasks: ■ Checking a CHUID Format on Page 174 ■ Applying a CHUID Format on Page 175 Checking a CHUID Format To Check a CHUID Format 1. In the CHUID Format editor, open the CHUID Format you want to use to replace an existing format. 2. Click CI and select the CHUID Format you want to replace. The Check whether this change will be valid button becomes enabled. 3. Click Check whether this change will be valid. The system performs a test and displays a Testing dialog box (Figure 47 on Page 175) that shows if any Credentials would fail to be applied. 174 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226987 CHUID Format Editor Figure 47: CHUID Testing Progress Dialog Box lestin • Results of reptec • t /IWO °mot 'Cord Only Global ' lath 'twit 200 bit' r. ..c.airgcecer thr dcdt ice Il• larnat Ica.). I Prepare." to teet la choleitto. 00eRAM earaeleel Fa ure Let Ithenging CHUIRFeast Iran Cad Only IGktug to tree 20) Di woke! here 10 :ucce:;e: out ol 10 Twee, Tom- (2349 TerwAft.JOe • (4444) IDe • 121 T baneKelvin • 18311 Joete0h. Shaine McQid:•Bibb- [8901 Lembo...on. Reel • (MI D1. • 112345651 .±1 ➢K I bit I beta 4. If you are satisfied with the result, you can apply the CHIUID Format using the Apply this CHUID Format button. See Applying a CHUID Format on Page 175. 5. You can save the CHUID Format by clicking Save and Close. Applying a CHUID Format If you want to apply a CHUID Format to existing Credentials that currently use a different CHUID Format, you can edit the CHUID Format you want to apply and use the Apply this CHUID Format button to apply the format, replacing the selected format in any Credentials that use that format. 6. Open the CHUID Format you want to apply in the CHUID Format editor. 7. Click CI to choose the CHUID Format you want to replace. a selection dialog box appears listing the CHUID Formats you can replace. 8. Click Apply this CHUID Format 9. A confirmation dialog box appears asking you if you are sure you want to apply the CH IAD format. todialmtion requested There are 10 credentialsmil. Cud Orly (Gebel' os oCttThrew. selectng theme thee OVID 'mot to l•e 203 be. My aeomeek who's OLIO hes changed ed be rednerkeded asMetal to conaciers. Are you sure that you went to apply ties CARO Ikons • If you are changing the CHUID on a database with a large number of credentials, it can take a long time to update all CHUIDs, especially if the new CHUID format length causes all CHUIDs in the system to change. A CHUID Progress dialog box appears (Figure 48 on Page 176) to allow you to keep track of the changes. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 9 175 EFTA01226988 CHUID Format Editor Figure 48: CHUID Valdatan Progress Dialog Box Report Results for replacing OVID Format 'Cud Only Kiloball.with 'card-facility from template erberd oedett -Gunn* Lova; - 0-arcng CHUIDFccox from Cal Only p,bailto ca-VaciWrantemptte Val.res CISUID Nana ID n coy OD 2097152CO3 boatman. 7cm) ts nct 164 CHUID Fermat ID n creden1S 00 2097152003 • Terrislata- 4:41 n not vid CHUID Ronal ID n aedera CO2097152003 -111 o not mid Chafing CHUIDFomet from Cat Only Kid* to calfacity from amide. 1 WO,S9,5 Prom. Ms: - [3467] Est lS 10. Click OK to close the dialog box. 176 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226989 Viewing a List of CHUID Formats Viewing a List of CHUID Formats You can view a list of all CHUID Formats by opening the default Dynamic View for CHUID Formats. To View a List of CHUID Formats 1. In the Navigation Pane of the Administration Workstation, click Personnel to open the Personnel pane. 2. Select CHUID Formats from the Personnel pane drop-down list. 3. Click Elag to open a Dynamic View listing all CHUID Format objects. 4. You can sort, filter, and group items in the list. 5. You can right-click a CHUID Format in the list to open the context menu and perform any of the functions on that menu. See "Using the Object List Context Menu" in the C•CURE 9000 Getting Started Guide for more information. 6. If you want to view a list of CHUID Format Templates, select the Template check box in the Search pane, then click a s . CHUID Definitions This section defines the fields and buttons on the CHUID Format Editor General tab. CHUID Format Editor Definitions Table 29 on Page 177 describes the fields on the CHUID Format Editor. Table 29: CHUID Format Editor Definitions Field Description Name The name of the CHUID format. The Maximum length can be 100 diaracters. Description Textual desaiption of the CHUID. The maximum length for the Description is 500 characters. Partition A read-onty field displaying the partition to which thlsCHUID Format belongs. This field is visible only d the C•CURE 9000 system is partitioned. Enabled This flag is used to indicate whether the CHUID Format can be selected for any card records. If Enabled isnot selected, you cannot assign the format to a Personnel record. If a CHUID Format is currently enabled, and the format is currently assigned to one or more Personnel records, you will receive an error message d you try to dear the Enabled field and save changes to the CHUID. You cannot dear the Enabled field until you remove the CHUID from any Personnel records to which it is assigned. You can view a 'slot Credentials to determine what CHUID formatsare assigned toeach Credential. CI RAD L„ -.; A read-onty field that spedrfies the number of characters in the CHUID Format. This value is calculated from the lengths of the individual fields in the CHUID Format. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 9 177 EFTA01226990 Viewing a List of CHUID Formats CHUID Format Editor Definitions (continued) Field Description CHUID Format Type A read-only field that identifies the the type of CHUID Format that this CHUID Format is based upon. Possible Values are: Card Only- based on the 10-character Card Number. Card Only 64 bits- based on a 20-character Card Number. PIN Only- based on a 10-character PIN. Extended Format - an extensible CHUID Format that lets you add or remove fields. Used by 128 bit SmartlD A Checkmark in this read-only field indicates that th is card format was created from the 128 bit CHUID Format Template for Smart ID usage. Use this format to decipher unknown CHUIDs in Journal If you select (9) this option, C•CURE 9000 will try to interpret card swipes by unknown cards using this CHUID format. so that the resulting Journal entry is more useful. Example: If you swipe an unknown card at a reader, as message similar to this appears: "Rejected (Unknown card)(1001000278) access request at 'door 1 [Default (IN)" If you have selected this option for the Card-Issue CHUID Format, the card number is interpreted using that CHUID Format: "Rejected (Unknown card)(Card: 100100027 Issue: 8) access request at 'door 1 [Default (IN)" CHUID Fields The field selections are those of the Personnel Identifier and the standard extended card fields. You can specify any number of fields until the maximum number of digits is reached. The field order is fixed, and cannot be changed by Operator. A CHUID Format must have at least one field to be saved Length The length of the selected field. Starting Position The calculated starting position of the field in the CHUID format. This isa read-only field that isautomaticaltycalculated based on the previous field's length. Ending Position The calculated ending position of the field in the CHUID format. This is a read-only field that is automatically calculated based on the field's length. CHUID Format Editor Buttons Table 30 on Page 178 describes the buttons on the CHUID Format Editor. Table 30: CHUID Format Editor Buttons Button Description Save and Close Click Save and Close when you have completed any changes to a CHUID Format and wish to save those changes. Create Copy Validatesthat: • There are no duplicated CHUID fields • All fields have vabd, non-zero lengths • The length of the CHUID Format snot odd • The length of the CHUID is greater than 10 and less than 80. Click this button to add a new row to the table representing the CHUID fields in this CHUID Format 178 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226991 Viewing a List of CHUID Formats CHUID Format Editor Buttons (continued) Button Description Remove Click the row selector to select one or more CHUID format field rows (hold down SHIFT or Ctrl to select multiple rows), then click this button to remove the row for this field. This button is unavailable when no rows exist. or no rows are selected. Validate Fields Validates that any change to the CHUID format fieldsdoesnot cause any CHUID Format Violations. This button validates that the fields are the correct length; it does not validate the CHUID format against existing Personnel records. Move up Click this button to move the selected row up one position in the CHUID Fields table, changing the order of the fields in this CHUID Format. This can be useful itthe order of fields on your access cards does not match the default order of fields in the CHUID Format. Move down Click th is button to move the selected row down one position in the CHUID Fieldstable, changing the order of the fieldsin this CHUID Format. Thiscan be useful if the order of fieidson your accesscardsdoes not match the default order of fields in the CHUID Format. C heck whether this change will be valid Click this button to check dalICHUIDs that would be changed have the correct length and fields. Displays a CHUID Validation Progressdiabg box that reports any errors. To make this button available. you need to click (J) and select the CHUID format you wish to replace. Clicking this button will not replace the CHUID format. only test to see the results if the CHUID format were repLaced. Apply this CHUID Format Click this button to replace an existing CHUID format with the CHUID format you are currentty ed ding. All credentials that use the selected CHUID format will be changed. To make this button available, you need to click 0 and select the CHUID format you wish to replace. Close when you want to close the CHUID Format Editor without saving your changes. A prompt appears so that you can choose to continue editing or close the editor. Click OK to close the editor without saving changes, or click Cancel to continue editing the CHUID Format. IXI Click CHUID Format Fields The following fields can be part of the CI-IUID Format. The fields are predetermined to be in the order listed below. Example: If Card Number is part of the CHUID, it will always be the first field in the CHUID. ■ Card Number ■ Facility Code ■ Issue Code ■ Agency Code ■ System Code ■ Credential Series ■ Credential Issue ■ HMAC ■ CardIntl - CardInt4 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 9 179 EFTA01226992 Viewing a Listot CHUID Formats • Personnel Identifier (Credentials Tab) • Association Category (Credentials Tab) • Organizational Identifier (Credentials Tab) • Organizational Category (Credentials Tab) NOTE Be aware that using Personnel Identifier, Association Category, Organizational Identifier, or Organizational Category in a CHUID format can significantly slow processing of bulk updates of Personnel such as Imports. 180 Chapter 9 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226993 10 Personnel Views The C•CURE 9000 Personnel Views Editor is used to create Personnel Views that allow you to customize the fields displayed in the Personnel Editor when an Operator edits a Personnel record. In this chapter Personnel Views Editor 182 Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab 189 Personnel Views Labels Tab 204 Personnel Views Options Tab 208 Personnel Views Properties Panel 210 Personnel Views Properties Tab 214 Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab 219 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle Chapter 10 181 EFTA01226994 Personnel Views Editor Personnel Views Editor A C•CURE 9000 Personnel View is used to provide the Personnel editor with a customized 'view' - a set of tabs that display only the fields that a given Operator needs to edit Personnel records at your site. With the Personnel Views editor, you can change the appearance of Personnel screens in C•CURE 9000, customizing the Personnel editor to show different fields and tabs. You can also add User-defined fields that you have configured to the Personnel Views (see the User-defined Fields chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information about User-defined fields). You can then edit a Personnel record using your new views to test them for appearance and function before making them available to C•CURE 9000 Operators (see Assigning Personnel Views to Operators on Page 186). The following sections provide more information about the Personnel Views editor and tasks you can perform using it. ■ Personnel Views Editor Tabs on Page 183. ■ Personnel Views Editor Tasks on Page 184. ■ Layout Designer Tab Tasks on Page 189. Some of the changes that you can make with the Personnel Views editor are: ■ Change the fields that are displayed on a Personnel editor view - see Adding a Field to a Tab on Page 194. ■ Create new tabs for a Personnel editor view - see Adding a Tab to a View on Page 199. ■ Change the size, location, and label of fields - see Changing Field Properties on Page 198. NOTE Changes to the labels of fields that are made using the Personnel View do not affect the label used for those fields on Dynamic Views, Reports, Exports, Imports, and Queries. Changes to the labels of fields that are made using the language translation features of the Multi￾language User Interface Editor do affect the label used for these fields by dynamic views, queries, reports, and exports. See the chapter in the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide on displaying C•CURE 9000 in multiple languages. Changes to the labels on fields that are made using the Customer Field editor on the Customer tab and Extended Customer tab do affect the label used for these fields on Dynamic Views, Reports, Exports, Imports, and Queries. See Understanding Personnel Views and the Customer Field Editor on Page 183. ■ Move fields from one tab to another - see Moving a Field to Another Tab on Page 195 ■ Remove a field from the View - see Removing a Field on Page 197 ■ Adjust the tab order of fields on a tab - see Setting the Tabbing Order for a Personnel View on Page 200. Default Personnel Views C•CURE 9000 provides two default Personnel views that cannot be modified or deleted, but can be saved as a copy (see Creating a Copy of a Personnel View on Page 185) for use as the basis of your customized Personnel Views: ■ Default Personnel Edit View - this view is similar to the Personnel editor in previous versions. 182 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226995 Personnel Views Editor ■ Personnel View with Header - this view shows the placement of Personnel Name-related fields so that they are not contained on a single tab, but are visible at all times. It contains fewer fields per tab (the Name header makes the size of each tab smaller). NOTE If you want to prevent Operators from accessing one or more of the Default Personnel Views, you can create an exception in the Operator Privilege. See Assigning Personnel Views to Operators on Page 186 Understanding Personnel Views and the Customer Field Editor The Customer Field editor lets you rename, move, and hide fields on the Personnel Editor Customer tab and Extended Customer tab, in one or more languages. The changes you make on these tabs using the Customer Field editor, particularly to the names of the fields, affect how these fields are displayed in Dynamic Views, Reports, Exports, Imports, and Queries. NOTE Moving, and hiding fields using the Customer Field editor does not affect existing Personnel Views, but does affect Personnel Views created subsequently. Renaming a label using the Customer Field Editor does affect existing Personnel View. Example: If you use the Customer Field editor to change the name of the Textl field to Department Name, subsequently when you display a Dynamic View of Personnel, one of the columns that you can choose to display is now Department Name rather than Textl. Similarly, if you create a Personnel Report, you can display the contents of the Department Name field on the Report. However, if you did not change Textl to Department Name in the Customer Field editor, and instead used the Personnel Views editor to change the Textlfield label on the Customer tab, the field appears as Textl in Dynamic Views, Reports, Exports, Imports, and Queries. This is because you are only changing the field's label when you use the Personnel Views editor. You are not changing the meaning of the field outside of the Personnel View. You are just changing the way the field is labelled on one specific Personnel View - other Personnel Views can display the field differently. Basic Guidelines Customer Field editor - use to change the name of a field on the Customer tab or Customer Extended tab when you want to change the way the field is displayed by C•CURE 9000 in Personnel, Dynamic Views, Reports, Exports, Imports, and Queries. Personnel Views editor - use when you want change the label of a Personnel field on any tab in a specific Personnel View. The change does not appear on Dynamic Views, Reports, Exports, Imports, Queries, or on any other Personnel View. Personnel Views Editor Tabs The Personnel Views Editor provides several tabbed views that you can use to configure the fields and tabs in your Personnel View. The editor also provides a View Properties form. The following sections give more information about each Personnel Views Editor tab and how to use it. ■ Personnel Views layout Designer Tab on Page 189. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 183 EFTA01226996 Personnel Views Editor • Personnel Views Labels Tab on Page 204. • Personnel Views Options Tab on Page 208. • Personnel Views Properties Panel on Page 210. • Personnel Views Properties Tab on Page 214. • Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab on Page 219. Figure 49: Personnel Views Editor Tabs With editable views Ls• Sane Regents Copy Wee Penmen Eras., Panto ORM Dagen. labels I Oren (mink,1Unted States' • gegen Labels COBS:are Senn Rent lobbeg Oeder Camerae I Cann Garret 6,4rdo4 eye. van inn I Unbind Snit in botioara ttitde Se, Lan Inn Onass Onsegee Heenan Sevn (AL`k Nonni Ambesseni Eyrie :notes nesbestext Even !babel Coneern•fstnentsb• Hijo.Ct Zoe beenstrene ot—tID scssern •see is not 'Om brown — lInfeenten Nen Lai nes )1 Raw no Tax rebeen 0 n Land :non TOP. Ikea BoorCobr O CMS Faedn CosoniToo 03 Location 0.3 Sao 361.5W 8 Swam None ormorenteare Peen oacksaCoros Twenn %von won-. crPlOptItC r.o <4, Note Mien 'pnned: the Properties nab and Fields and Controls tab display On the Ildhl edge Of the edger Personnel Views Editor Tasks PIOPellieS tab Fieldsand Controls tab You can perform the following tasks with the Personnel Views Editor to configure a Personnel View. • Personnel Object Tasks on Page 18. • Accessing the Personnel Views Editor on Page 185. • Creating a Copy of a Personnel View on Page 185. • Using the Personnel Views List Context Menu on Page 186. 184 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226997 Personnel Views Editor • Assigning Personnel Views to Operators on Page 186. Accessing the Personnel Views Editor You can access the Personnel Views Editor from the C•CURE 9000 Personnel pane. To Access the Personnel Views Editor 1. Display a Dynamic View list of Personnel Views (see Using the Personnel Views List Context Menu on Page 186). 2. Double-click the name of the Personnel View in the list that you want to edit, and the Personnel Views Editor opens (see Figure 50 on Page 185). Figure 50: PersonnelViewsEditor NOTE A A P Dem Oe.pher UM 7 <So • *S.C. 1•••••••••••41.a. • • tl•••••1051. %OW. tral loSI COWS Ic.son• I on...to-est hovel ISO I C•••••:C••••• Cowl Ilk Pone *wean rem, Is.§0.1. CPI tunas,. I et Because the Personnel Views editor needs to load Personnel View data and the tools to edit this data, as well as any User-defined Fields included in the View, the Personnel Views Editor typically takes longer to load than the Personnel editor. Creating a Copy of a Personnel View You can create a copy of a Personnel View by using the Create Copy button in the Personnel Views Editor. When you create a copy of a Personnel View, everything in the view you copied is duplicated in the new View except the name of the view. When you save the new view you must give it a new object name that is unique. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 185 EFTA01226998 Personnel Views Editor NOTE A copy of a view differs from a Personnel View Template in that the original and the copy can both be used to edit Personnel records and can be assigned to Operators. A Personnel View Template cannot be used to edit or modify Personnel records and it cannot be assigned to Operators - it is used strictly as a model for creating new views. To Create a Copy of a Personnel View 1. Open the Personnel View you wish to copy. (See Accessing the Personnel Views Editor on Page 185.) 2. Click Create Copyr. A copy of the Personnel View you were editing is created and opened in the Personnel Views Editor. 3. Type a unique name for the new Personnel View in the Name field. 4. Make any editing changes you wish to the Personnel View. 5. Click Save and Close to save your new Personnel View. Using the Personnel Views List Context Menu The Personnel Views context menu that opens when you right-click on one or more Personnel Views in the list of Personnel Views includes selections that are common to all objects. See Using the Object List Context Menu on Page 23 for more information on the common selections. Assigning Personnel Views to Operators When you create a new Personnel View and enable the view, Operators who have Privileges to access Personnel are given read-only access to the new view (provided the new view resides in a Partition that the Operator can access), and they can use the views to edit Personnel. If a view is not enabled, Operators cannot use it. You can control how Operators can use Personnel Views to create or edit Personnel Records. See Personnel Views Options Tab on Page 208. NOTE If you create a Personnel View in the Default Partition, any Operator who has the Privilege Access to Common Objects has read-only access to the view unless you remove access by creating an exception. Conversely, if you do not want an Operator to have any access to a Personnel View (either one you created or a Default Personnel View), you need to use the Privilege editor to prohibit that access by adding an exception. To Assign a Personnel View to an Operator 1. Click Configuration in the Navigation pane. 2. Select Privilege from the Configuration pane drop-down list. 3. Click New to create a new Privilege (or edit an existing Privilege by clicking gs, selecting the Privilege from the Dynamic View that appears, and double-clicking). 4. Click Personnel Views in the list of Classes. The Permissions list for Personnel Views appears in the Permissions box. 186 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01226999 Personnel Views Editor 5. Click 2 in the Grant column for permissions you wish to give to Operators with this Privilege. Example: If you do not want Operators with this Privilege to be able to access any Personnel Views, click in the No Access row. 6. If you want to set specific Permissions for individual Personnel Views: a. Click on the Exceptions tab. b. Click Personnel Views in the list of Classes. c. Click Add to select one or more Personnel Views from a list, and click OK to add them to the Exception Objects table. d. Click on the row for a Personnel View in the Exception Objects table. e. Click 2 in the Grant column for permissions you wish to give to Operators with this Privilege. 7. When you are done setting Permissions, click Save and Close to save your settings and close the Privilege editor. 8. If this Privilege is not already assigned to your Operator(s), select Operator from the Configuration pane drop￾down list. 9. Click ak and select the Operator from the Dynamic View that appears, and double-click to edit the Operator. 10. To add the Privilege to this Operator, click Add in the Privileges and Schedules table. 11. Click in the new row in the Privilege column, then click in to select the Privilege to add. 12. Click on a Privilege in the Privilege dialog box that appears. 13. Click in the new row in the Schedule column, then click n to select the Schedule for the Privilege. 14. Click Save and Close to save your settings and close the Operator editor. To Remove Access to a Personnel View from an Operator 1. Click Configuration in the Navigation pane. 2. Select Privilege from the Configuration pane drop-down list. 3. Click na to select the Privilege that you wish to edit from the Dynamic View that appears, and double-click it. 4. Click the Exceptions tab. 5. Click Personnel Views in the list of Classes. 6. Click Add in the Exception Objects box. 7. Click the Personnel View(s) that you want to prevent Operators with this Privilege from using. You can use multiple selection (CTRL+Shift for a range or CTRL+Left-click for individual Privileges) to pick more than one Personnel View. 8. Click OK and these exceptions are added to the Exception Objects table. 9. In the Permissions table, click 2 in the Grant column to set the permission exceptions. • If you select No Access, the Operators with this Privilege are not able to access (or even see) the selected Personnel Views. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle Chapter 10 187 EFTA01227000 Personnel Views Editor • If you select Read, they are only able to view these Personnel Views, but not edit the contents. 10. When you are done setting Exceptions, click Save and Close to save your settings and close the Privilege editor. 188 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227001 Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab The Personnel Views Layout Designer tab lets you change the content and appearance of the Personnel editor in a particular Personnel View. You can move, remove and resize fields, add/remove tabs and boxes, and adjust the view to accommodate different languages in order to tailor the Personnel View to the needs of your Operators. Figure 51 on Page 189 shows the Personnel Views Layout Designer tab. Figure 51: Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab L.Personnel views - azoo and Cose Create Co • • awe &M OM r Enoloixl Pear: NOM Layout Designer ilAb ls nrpe orts Loccor: finish (toted Stores) e &gat L%ds Restore Lay≥R PPEet rekbovi Order dell Images I Bating' [mica [broom I PtwianDmsj Usepoofned Fields I Docwntsl Pataorel TtigcNts I Otoci lO Pettorviel Tkoe. Opeuto: Nano Patbico I Emal Erpol adders: E:coti Noon: Etta) OpIcet. PIN Nadi:cc:ton Hutay eft I IM minim J 1 e ▪ fdds and Cot* - Toth Group8ox TebPne A Labd Hidden Roth gr•ocemes ai Rea and Controls A • See Layout Designer Tab Tasks on Page 189 for a list of the tasks you can perform from the Layout Designer tab. • See Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab Definitions on Page 202 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel View layout Designer Tab. Layout Designer Tab Tasks See the following sections for instructions on performing layout Designer tasks. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 189 EFTA01227002 Personnel Views Layout Desgner Tab ■ Displaying the Layout Designer in a Floating Window on Page 190 ■ Selecting a Language on Page 191 ■ Restoring Labels on Page 192 ■ Restoring a Layout on Page 193 ■ Selecting Objects in the layout on Page 193 ■ Moving a Field to the Front or Back on Page 195 ■ Moving a Field to Another Tab on Page 195 ■ Moving a Field to a Different Group Box on Page 196 ■ Resizing a Field on Page 196 ■ Removing a Field on Page 197 ■ Aligning Fields on Page 197 ■ Changing a Field label on Page 198 ■ Changing Field Properties on Page 198 ■ Adding a Tab to a View on Page 199 ■ Removing a Tab on Page 200 ■ Adding a Group Box on Page 201 Displaying the Layout Designer in a Floating Window You can display the Layout Designer in a floating window outside the C•CURE 9000 Content pane. Being able to move the layout Designer to a screen location outside of the C•CURE 9000 Admin application can be useful if you want to see how an existing Personnel screen appears while you are designing a new view. Also, you can make the floating window larger or smaller so that you can see more of less of the layout design, as is convenient. To Float or Dock the Layout Designer ■ Double-click on the title bar of the Layout Designer to float the window. You can then move it anywhere on the desktop. ■ Double-click on the title bar of a floating Layout Designer window to dock the window (return it to the Personnel Views Editor window). 190 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227003 Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab Figure 52: Float Layout Designer to Move it on Desktop Lapsut Designee I Label: 0pbons Engles!, (nited States) ' Bata. UM% iJ RestoreIsaut Rea Tabbing Chde Double￾click on tab to float Double- / click on title bar to .9 020 19 Mann I Cuomo Car Banded I Saw I Bodging I hobs* L—Onxeo —fib I Language English (United States) • ' gestore Labels ti) SeStOre LaysZul Reset Tagbmg Ode , Calms* 1 Dermas I Wagner kustcaot Winded II Sign I ladiOrg I Porslol Doom I Firs Nemo *OS Nom Lost Now E Diutled E ants Shunt (ADA) ri **id EAnocassback Seem E Acorns konossbeek Ewan E &WSW Ccenrnorda Annoy*" E fr es on Zone keninestrafoi ft? Moon ID Personnel Tor Operates Name PIN **eaten Kenny earbbon. FIN Lan oder! on edited by Selecting a Language When you are editing a Personnel View, you can make changes to the way the Personnel View appears in one or more languages. NOTE When you use the Personnel Views Editor to make changes in any language, you are changing only the label of the fields in the Personnel View only, not the meaning of the field, or how it is used by C•CURE 9000 for other purposes such as Dynamic Views, Reports, or Queries. Also, you can only make language changes for language versions currently residing on your system. When you choose a language from the Language field drop-down list, the list only contains the languages for which language resources already exist on your system. There are two ways for language resources to be added to a C•CURE 9000 system. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 191 EFTA01227004 Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab ■ Install a C•CURE 9000 Language Pack. See the C• CURE 9000 Installation and Upgrade Guide for more information. ■ Create a language translation using the Multilingual User Interface Editor, a purchaseable option. See the C•CURE 9000 System Maintenance Guide for more information. Language resources created via the first two methods can be manually installed on a remote C•CURE 9000 client To Select a Language 1. From the Personnel View layout Design tab, click the down-arrow in the language field. A list appears showing the available languages on your system. 2. Select a language from the language drop-down list. The resources for that language are applied to the fields on your Personnel View. Restoring Deleted Objects If you delete an object (such as a field, label, GroupBox, or Tab) you can restore it by clicking Ctrl+z. You can restore multiple deletions by repeating the Clrl+z key combination. Example: If you delete the First Name field, the Customer Tab, and the PIN Group Box, you can click Ctrl+z three times to restore the deleted objects. Clrl+z does not restore changes to object properties. Example: If you change the label for Last Name to "Surname' and the BackColor to 'Red', then click Cirl+z, the previous property values are not restored. Restoring Labels You can restore all the labels in a Personnel View to the default values of the Default Personnel View using the Restore Labels button on the layout Designer or on the labels tab. Clicking this button restores all field labels to the value they have in the default Personnel View. This button does not restore fields that you have moved to a different tab or removed from the view. You can restore an individual label by selecting the labe and setting the UseDefaultLabel property on the Properties tab to True. To Restore All Labels 1. Open the Personnel View for editing. See Accessing the Personnel Views Editor on Page 185. 2. Click Restore Labels on the layout Designer tab. 3. Click Yes to confirm your action. All labels are changed to the default values that are in the Default Personnel View. 192 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227005 Personnel Views Layout Dewier Tab Restoring a Layout You can restore a Personnel View to the original default layout of the Default Personnel View (including tabs for User-defined fields). TheRestore Layout button on the Personnel View Layout Designer can be used to discard any layout changes you have made, so that you can start again with the Default layout. NOTE If you created your Personnel View from a Personnel View Template and you click Restore Layout, the Layout is restored to the original default settings, not to the settings saved in the template. Additionally, any User-defined Fields that are accessible to the current Operator are added to the restored view. To start again from the template, create a new Personnel View from the template. To Restore a Layout 1. Open the Personnel View for editing. See Accessing the Personnel Views Editor on Page 185. 2. Click Restore Layout on the Layout Designer tab. 3. Click Yes to confirm your action. MI tabs in the View are changed to the default fields and positions that are in the Default Personnel View. Selecting Objects in the Layout You can select one or more objects on the Layout Design tab using the mouse and keyboard, so that you can move these objects, change these object's properties, or change their front-to-back order relative to other objects on the layout design. See Table 31 on Page 194 for a list of selection methods. Example: If you wish to change the background color of a field and its label, then move the field and label to a new position on the layout, you can select both the field and its label so that your changes apply to both. When you select an object, the selection handles (black or white squares at the edges of the field or button) used to move and resize the object become visible. See Figure 53 on Page 193. Figure 53: Selection Handles en.wit Oedema Ckertrees I Comae. I Cutlets blended 'woes I Bad** • • • • • • Ent Nerns:O Etidde Natal OH Herne? When you select multiple objects, the first object selected has white handles and is the 'active' object - if you choose to align the objects, they align with the object selected with white handles. If you select multiple objects, you can re￾click one of the objects to make it the 'active' (white handle) object (see Figure 54 on Page 194). C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 193 EFTA01227006 Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab F Igu re 54: Active Selection Handle G,re. Ciedelmli °taco: Cwogret Cuaont, Condo! Inar; ea3zo This object's 'active' En' Hem Rd* /Lune kra Uwe: Click this object Genod GedenaS: Clerance: Cuaoner CuacmetEtterdol lame: 8410n0 • • vs Ilene? • bid* Picea . Lad Nati And It becomes 'active' Table 31: Selecting Objects In the Layout Design Tab To Select: Do: Field. Label. or Tab Left-clickon the object. More than one object. such as a Field and its Label. CTRL*Left-click on each object or SHIFT*Left-click on each object. The first object you select is 'active' (white handles). Multiple Objects Left-click on an empty spot in the layout and drag the mouse pointer to draw a selection box around multiple objects. When you release the left mouse button, all the objectswithin (even partially) the selection box are selected. The object nearest the top of the selection box is 'active' (white handles). Adding a Field to a Tab You can add a field to a tab by selecting the field in the Fields and Controls tab (see Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab on Page 219) and dragging it to the a tab in the Personnel View. The Fields and Controls tab includes two types of fields that you can add: • Fields that were previously removed from the Personnel View. • User-defined fields that were added to CoCURE 9000, but have not yet been added to this Personnel View. Moving a Field or Label You can change the location of a field or label on a view tab by selecting it with the mouse and dragging it to a new location. 194 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227007 PersonnelViews Layout Designer Tab NOTE NOTE To move a field from one tab to another, you must remove the field from the tab it is located on, then add the field to the other tab. See Moving a Field to Another Tab on Page 195 for more information. Fields and their labels must be selected together (see Selecting Objects in the Layout on Page 193) if you want to move them together. If you select and move the field alone, its label does not move. To Move a Field or Label 1. Click on the field or label you want to move. (You can use multiple selection methods to select more than one field or label - see Selecting Objects in the Layout on Page 193). The selection handles for the object become visible. See Figure 53 on Page 193 for an example. 2. Hover the mouse over the selected objects until the cursor changes to 4 0., then hold down the left mouse button and drag the objects to a new position. 3. Release the mouse button to complete the move. Moving a Field to the Front or Back You can move objects in the layout so that they are behind or in front of other objects using the Bring to Front and Send to Back selections on the Layout Design context menu. If multiple objects overlap, you can repeat these functions to position the objects. Example: You have a Group Box, a field and text label, and a label with a colored background. You want the field and text label on top, the Group Box on the bottom, and the colored label in front of the Group Box but behind the field and label. If the colored label is in completely in front of the field and its label, you can select the colored label and click Send to Back. But now it is under the group box. You can select the Group Box and click Send to Back so that the group box is behind the colored label, and the colored label is behind the field and its label. IMI To Move a Field to the Front or Back 1. Click on the field, label, or object you want to move. (You can use multiple selection methods to select more than one field or label - see Selecting Objects in the Layout on Page 193). 2. Hover the mouse over the selected object(s), then right-click to open the context menu. • Click Bring to Front to move the object(s) on top of other objects that it overlaps. • Click Send to Back to move the object(s) behind other objects that it overlaps. Moving a Field to Another Tab To move a field (or other object) to a different tab, you need to remove it from its current tab and then add it to the other tab. When you remove a field, the field and its label are placed on the Fields and Control tab as a single entity. From there you can drag the field to another tab. To Move a Field to Another Tab I . Select the field you want to move. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 195 EFTA01227008 Personnel Views Layout Desgner Tab 2. Right-click and select Delete. The field - and its label - are removed from the tab and placed in the Hidden Fields folder in the Fields and Controls pane. 3. Click the tab on which you wish to place the field. 4. Click on the Fields and Controls tab of the Properties Form. 5. Locate the field you wish to place on the tab within the Hidden Fields folder, in a subfolder named for the tab where the field was originally. Example: If you deleted the field from the General tab to move it to the Badging tab, look in the General folder to find the field. 6. Select the field and drag it to a position on the tab. The field and its label are placed on the new tab. 7. You can then drag the field and label with the mouse to a precise location. Moving a Field to a Different Group Box You t an move a field from one Group Box to another, or from anywhere into a Group Box. To Move a Field to a Different Group Box 1. Select the field (and optionally its label) you want to move. 2. Click the left mouse button and drag the selected object(s) to the new position inside the Group Box. 3. Release the mouse button to drop the object(s). Resizing a Field You can resize a field or other object such as a label or Group Box using the mouse or by changing the size property in the Properties panel Not all fields are resizable (for example, check box controls shrink and grow with the length of the text label). When you resize a field or label, you should consider the potential size for text if the Personnel View is translated into a language that typically needs larger field and label sizes, because the positions and sizes of the controls in a Personnel View are the same for any language the system is configured to use. NOTE a To Resize a Field Using the Mouse 1. Select the field that you want to resize by clicking it. Selection handles (see Figure 53 on Page 193) appear along the field's edges. 2. Click and hold the left mouse button on a selection handle and drag to make the field larger or smaller. To Resize a Field Using the Properties Panel 1. Select the field that you want to resize by clicking it. 2. Display the Properties tab for the field (see Personnel Views Properties Tab Definitions on Page 214). 196 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle EFTA01227009 Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab 3. Click in the Layout>Size field. 4. Change the first number to change the field Width; change the second number to change the field Height. Example: The field size is currently 500,200. To change the Height to 300 change the field size to 500,300. Removing a Field You can remove a field from the Personnel View. A field that is removed from the Personnel View is listed in the Fields and Controls tab tree view until it is again placed on a tab in the Personnel View. To Remove a Field 1. Select the field (or the label of the field) you want to remove. 2. Right-click and select Delete. The field and its label are removed from the tab (and placed in the Hidden Field folder on the Fields and Controls tab as a single entity). 3. You can open the Fields and Controls tree view to find the field and add it to another tab or group box by dragging and dropping it. Aligning Fields You can align selected fields in several ways: Align Left - Aligns the left edge of the selected fields to the left edge of the 'active' field (white selection handles). Use this by selecting vertically positioned fields. If you try to use Align Left on fields that are horizontally aligned, the fields will overlap horizontally. Align Right - Aligns the right edge of the selected fields to the right edge of the 'active' field (white selection handles). Use this by selecting vertically positioned fields. If you try to use Align Right on fields that are horizontally aligned, the fields will overlap horizontally. Align Top - Aligns the top edge of the selected fields to the top edge of the 'active' field (white selection handles). Use this by selecting horizontally positioned fields. If you try to use Align Top on fields that are vertically aligned, the fields will overlap vertically. Align Bottom - Aligns the bottom edge of the selected fields to the bottom edge of the 'active' field (white selection handles). Use this by selecting horizontally positioned fields. If you try to use Align Bottom on fields that are vertically aligned, the fields will overlap vertically. To Align Fields 1. Select the fields (and/or labels) you want to align, using multiple selection (CTRL+Left-click on each field). 2. Click on the selected object to which you want to align the other objects. That object's selection handles become 'active' (white). 3. Right-click and select an alignment option (Align Left, Align Right, Align Top, or Align Bottom) from the context menu. 4. The selected fields are aligned to the 'active' object according to the option you chose. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 197 EFTA01227010 Personnel Views Layout Desgner Tab Changing a Field Label You can change the label that identifies a field on the Personnel View. When you edit the label and change it, you are only changing the display label for the field in this view, not changing the meaning of the field in the C•CURE 9000 System. Nor are you changing the system label (the label that is used to identify the field in Dynamic Views, Reports, and Queries). To change the system label, you should use a translation tool like the Multilingual User Interface editor. To Change a Field Label 1. Select the label associated with the field you want to change. 2. Display the Properties tab for that Label (see Personnel Views Properties Tab Definitions on Page 214). 3. In the Translafion>Label property, type the new display label that you want to use. Example: If you want to change the display label for Text2 to "Identity" select the Text2 Label, then change the Translafion>Label property to "Identity". 4. If you want to assign a hot key to a letter or number in the Label, type an "&" in front of the character in the Label that you want to use as a Hot key. When a user holds down Mt and types this letter or number, the cursor tabs to this field. NOTE Hot keys are enabled on a per tab basis. If you assign "S" to a field label on the General tab, that hot key only works on the General tab and does not conflict with a hot key assignment of "S" on another tab. If you assign the same letter or number to two or more fields on the same tab, the user will need to press the hot key several times to cycle between the fields to which the hot key is assigned. See Creating Hot Keys on a Personnel View Tab on Page 218 for more information. Changing Field Properties Youu;n1 ;iktiust the display properties of fields in your Personnel Views. To Change Field Properties 1. Display the Properties tab (see Personnel Views Properties Tab on Page 214). 2. Select the field that you want to modify. That field's properties appear in the Properties tab. (Alternatively you can select the control, right-click, then select Properties from the context menu to open the Properties form.) 3. You can now modify any of the editable property values for the field. Example • You can change the ReadOnly property of a TextBox field to True if you do not want the field's content's to be editable. • You can change the BackColor property of a field to a different color. • You can change the Label property of a field so that a different field name is displayed on the view. 198 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227011 Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab Adding a Tab to a View You can add a new tab to a Personnel View. You can then add fields to the tab, or move fields from other tabs to the new tab (see Moving a Field to Another Tab on Page 195). There are two kinds of tabs (see ): • A TabPage (like the General tab) can contain fields and TabControls. You can add a TabPage to the main page of the Personnel View - the personnelTabControl - to add a new tab at the same level as default tabs such as General, Badging, etc.). • A TabControl can contain fields and TabPages. You can add a TabControl to an existing tab and then add TabPages to the TabControl. An example of a TabControl is the tabControlCredentiallnfo object on the default Credentials tab - you can add more TabPages to this TabControl. Figure 55: TabPage and TabControl iii ;inesa CiServia": Clear arcel Cusianet Cuttanet Egtreed 846;ing ProviDut D (tatTabPapel doe otWarl 3 Caplife Swan, Suwue flemoveScrome abPages ITabControt To Add a TabPage 1. From the Personnel Views Editor Fields and Controls tab, double-click on the Tools folder. (Alternatively you can select a tab, right-click, then select Add Tab from the context menu. 2. Drag the TabPage from the Tools folder to the interior of an existing tab and release. The Tab control is added to that tab. If you drag the TabPage to the main tab page (personnelTabControl) and release, the tab control is added at the same level as the default tabs (General, Credentials, etc.). To Add a TabControl 1. From the Personnel Views Editor Fields and Controls tab, double-click on the Tools folder. (Alternatively you can select a tab, right-click, then select Add Tab from the context menu. 2. Drag the TabControl from the Tools folder to the interior of an existing tab and release. The Tab control is added to that tab. 3. You can now add fields (or more TabPages) to the new TabControl (see Adding a Field to a Tab on Page 194). C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 199 EFTA01227012 Personnel Views Layout Desgner Tab Removing a Tab You can remove a tab from a Personnel View if you do not want it to be used by your Operators. You can then add fields from that tab to other tabs if needed. To Remove a Tab 1. From the Personnel Views Editor Layout Designer, click on the tab you want to remove. 2. Right-click and select Remove Tab from the context menu. 3. The tab is deleted and any fields on the tab are moved to the Tabs and Fields pane in the Hidden Fields folder. You can open this folder and drag fields from this folder to a position on the Layout Designer. Setting the Tabbing Order for a Personnel View Tab order governs the way the cursor moves when an Operator clicks the Tab key. The field, labels, and buttons in a Personnel View each have a Tabindex number assigned to them, and the numerical order of the Tabindex determines what object the cursor moves to when Tab is pressed. Typically, the default Tab Order moves the cursor from field to field from top left to bottom right within each Tab in the View (each Tab has its own tab order). When you add, remove, or move objects in a View, it can affect the tab order because the new objects might be placed between objects that used to be adjacent. This can cause the cursor to seem to jump over fields when Tab is clicked. You can adjust the tab order in two ways: • You can manually change the tab order for a field by changing the Tabindex property on the Properties tab. • You can click Reset Tabbing Order to set the tab order for all objects in the View. This button assigns every object on a tab in the Views editor a value that is 10 greater than the proceeding value. After performing a reset, every object can be tabbed in order from upper left to lower right on each tab. This can save you considerable time if you would like to re-establish the tabbing order after you have moved a number of fields to new positions. dMI To Reset the Tabbing Order for a View 1. From the Personnel View Layout Designer tab, click Reset Tabbing Order. 2. The tab order for each object on each tab in the View is recalculated. To Set the Tabindex for an Object 1. From the Personnel View Layout Designer tab, click on the object for which you want to change tab order. 2. Click on the Properties tab. 3. In the TabIndex property, type the number for the new tab order and click Enter. 200 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227013 Adding a Group Box You can add a GroupBox to a tab in a Personnel View. A GroupBox is used to visually group one or more fields on a tab. It can also provide additional information to the Operator about how the fields in the GroupBox are related, and how to use them. When you select a GroupBox in the Personnel Views Editor, moving or deleting the box moves or deletes all the fields within the GroupBox. To Add a Group Box 1. Display the Fields and Controls tab (see Personnel Views Properties Tab Definitions on Page 214). 2. Display the tab to which you wish to add a Group Box. 3. Select the GroupBox control in the Fields and Controls Tools folder. 4. Drag the GroupBox to the tab. 5. Position the GroupBox on the tab using the + icon. 6. Resize the GroupBox as needed. 7. You can now add other fields, labels, or buttons to the Group Box. 8. If you add a Group Box on top of other fields, these fields do not become part of the Group Box unless you move the fields so that they are fully contained within the Group Box. Deleting a Group Box You can delete a Group Box from the View Layout. When you delete a custom Group Box that has fields within it, the box and all of its contents are deleted from the View. In addition, the Title and properties of the Group Box are deleted - they are not preserved in the Fields and Controls tab. If you accidentally delete a Group Box, you can: • Click Ctrl+z to undo the deletion. • Restore it using Restore Layout (if it was part of the original default view), but that discards any other layout or label changes you have made, even if you have saved previous changes. • Click to close the editor, and answer No to the prompt "Save changes before editing?" Any changes you made during this editing session are discarded. If you are going to delete a Group Box but do not want to delete the fields that reside in the Group Box, you should move those fields outside of the Group Box before deleting. To Delete a Group Box 1. Display the tab on which the GroupBox you wish to delete resides. 2. Remove from the Group Box any fields, labels, or buttons you wish to preserve on the view and move them onto the Tab outside the Group Box. 3. Select the GroupBox and click Delete. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukie Chapter 10 201 EFTA01227014 Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab 4. The GroupBox is deleted from the Tab. 5. Re-arrange the controls you moved from the Group Box. 6. You can clickSave and Close to save your changes, or continue editing the view. Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Views Layout Designer tab are shown in Table 32 on Page 202. The selections available on the Layout Design tab context menu are defined in Table 33 on Page 202. Table 32: Personnel Views Layout Designer Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Language This drop-down list shows the languages for which C•CURE 9000 language resources have been installed on your system. See Selecting a Language on Page 191. Restore Labels Changes the text of all the custom labels, group boxes, and tabs on the layout to be equal to the"Defautt Label' text. Changes to other properties (Color and Anchor for example) are not affected. When you click Restore Labels. a warning box appears asking you to oonfam this change. For User-defined fields. this button sets the label to the name of the user-defined field. Restore Layout Restores all tabs in the layout to the Default Personnel Edit View, and places all User-defined fields that you can accessonto the Personnel View. When you click Restore Layout, a warning message appears asking you to confirm that allcustomizationswill revert to their default characteristics if you click this button. Reset Tabbing Order Sets the tab order for every object in the Views editor. When you move fields, labels, and boxes around the view without adjusting their Tabindex, they maintain the original tab order. Example: If you move the PIN field directly under the Last Name field, when a user clicks Tab repeatedly the PIN field will still be after the Partition field rather than the Last Name field. This button assigns every object in the Views editor a value that is 10 greater than the proceeding value so that every object can be tabbed in order from upper left to lower right on each tab. Thiscan save you considerable time if you would like to re-establish the tabbing order after you have moved a number of fields to new positions. Additionally, you can make manual corrections to the tabbing order if needed. Table 33: Layout Design Context Menu Selection Description Bring to Front Select one or more objects in the Design Layout. then click Bring to Front to move the selected objects to the top layer of the layout. in front of other objects. Send to Back Select one or more objects in the Design Layout. then click Send to Back to move the selected objects to the bottom layer of the layout. in back of other objects. Algn Left Moves all selected objects so that their left edges are aligned to the object on which you opened the context menu. Align Right Moves all selected objects so that their right edges are aligned to the object on which you opened the context menu. Align Top Moves all selected objects so that their top edges are aligned to the object on which you opened the context menu. 202 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Con figutatIon Guide EFTA01227015 PersonnelViews Layout Designer Tab Layout Design Context Menu (continued) Selection Description Align Bottom Moves all selected objects so that their bottom edges are aligned to the object on which you opened the context menu. Delete Removes the selected objects from the view and places them on the Fields and Controls tab, from which they can be placed back on the view on a different tab or location. Properties Opens the Properties tab for the selected object. If you select multiple objects, even of different types, the Properties that they have in common are selected. Example: You could change the BackColor of a Label, a Field, and a GroupBox if you selected al three and chose Properties. Add Tab Click to add a new tab to the View. (Available onty when the personnelTabControl is selected). The new tab is added to the right of the User-defined Fields tab in the layout. Remove Tab Click to remove the selected tab from View. (Available onty when the person nelTa bControl is selected). The tab and all of its fields are removed from the Personnel View. so if you plan to remove a tab you should consider moving its fields to another tab first. C•CURE 9000 Personnel ConfiguratIon Guide Chapter 10 203 EFTA01227016 Personnel Views Labels Tab Personnel Views Labels Tab The Personnel Views Labels tab lets you edit the labels for all fields in a Personnel View. In addition, you can make changes to the way the Personnel Views labels appear in one or more languages. NOTE When you use the Personnel Views labels tab to make changes in any language, you are changing only the labels of the fields in the Personnel Views, not the meaning of the field, or how it is used by C•CURE 9000 for other purposes, such as Dynamic Views, Reports, or Queries. Also, you can only make language changes for language versions currently residing on your system. When you choose a language from the language field drop-down list, the list only contains the languages for which language resources already exist on your C•CURE 9000 system. See Personnel Views Labels Tab Definitions on Page 206 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Views Labels tab. Figure 56 on Page 204 shows the Personnel Views Labels tab. Figure 56: Personnel Views Labels Tab Layout Demmer . Lan9LaMr English • labels roe. (Unted State. • BeMor• labels Location Ham Oaks* Land Lobel General IabParGencrai General Genecal Grind LabelOcraton Watson Watson Gad cromlbar PIN Pal PM Gcsieral lab-al Pain PUN General CrtMeorlent CM Modlicatna Kenn 1400toalon twory Genies iabsitseader las Maki by Les Mead by Gelb al kindliest EcIeDate lad Mad an Las «MM on General labelOoeratocklocson Oceratear lane OCerSolt Kase General GILMalkirOctrons 00tens Genre Genera check Bea intrancnkne Intikeor Iona Marmite Menem Ion. Mr.* te Gann* cneckembevelkasmOrd &Keypad Gsmarole Mrerneratee Lemma Cannons Manna General cesoklilmaflyere Avativrem art oasts* Caere knaveke klicombock (tett General Mark ElarAPBEknot /roam benk ELeme. freoenbeck flames Gerd cnschlkablebood blanked Necked General cncol•BoxADA lkonite Siam ISDN &Manse Start CaDik General dame Saistembed Passed Naas General labstramonnel Time ammo, by Porwriel Taws Gann* Lebeilknameill) gaged ID Cressr ID General 'atekaat llm 4Lint Norm &Lad Kane Gas Lebid lackhe Mane Mldd. Name Mk.* Nam General Lanifinttlatis SR* Nam Dial Plane caraeress iabPalleGeManals Geaccatils GeMrtatils General tatakimermenirmeltretl Geneml General Labels Tab Tasks The Labels tab provides you with an alternate way to view and edit the labels for fields in your Personnel Views. The Labels tab contains a list of all the labels from all the tabs in your Personnel View. When you select a label on the labels tab, the label is also selected on the layout Designer tab. You can perform the following tasks from the labels tab: • Displaying the Labels Tab in a Floating Window on Page 205 • Editing labels in a Selected Language on Page 205 • Restoring Default Labels on Page 205 • Sorting labels on Page 206 204 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle EFTA01227017 Personnel Views Labels Tab ■ Editing Labels Using the labels Tab on Page 206 Displaying the Labels Tab in a Floating Window You can display the labels Tab in a floating window outside the C•CURE 9000 Content pane. Being able to move the labels Tab to a screen location outside of the C•CURE 9000 Admin application can be useful if you want to see how an existing Personnel screen appears while you are designing a new view. Also, you can make the floating window larger or smaller so that you can see more of less of the labels tab, as is convenient. To Float or Dock the Labels Tab ■ Double-click on the title bar of the Labels Tab to float the window. You can then move it anywhere on the desktop. ■ Double-click on the title bar of a floating labels Tab window to dock the window (return it to the Administration Client content pane). Editing Labels in a Selected Language You can select a language on the Labels tab so that you can edit labels for the View in that language. You can only choose languages for which language resources already exist on your system - you cannot create a new language version of the View from the Personnel Views editor. See Selecting a Language on Page 191 for more information about language resources and the Personnel Views Editor. A label has the same position on the View for all the languages. You can display labels in different languages to verify that labels do not overlap other controls in cases where the label text has a different length in other languages. To Edit Labels in a Selected Language 1. In the Personnel Views Editor, click on the labels tab. 2. Select a language from the language field drop-down list. 3. Select the label that you want to translate. 4. In the Label column, type the label you want to display for the target language to replace the default language label. 5. To save the settings, click Save and Close. Restoring Default Labels You um, '11;1Re all of the Personnel View labels (in all languages) revert to their default values. To Restore All Labels to Their Default Values 1. In the Personnel Views Editor, click on the labels tab. 2. Click Restore Labels. MI Labels in all languages are reset to their default values. 3. To save the settings, click Save and Close. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 205 EFTA01227018 PersonnelViewsLabelsTab Sorting Labels You can sort the labels on the Labels tab by the columns in the table by clicking on a column heading. Changing the sorting on the Labels tab does not change any label's placement in the Personnel View layout. dMI To Sort Labels by Label Name 1. From the Labels tab of the Personnel Views editor, click on the Name column in the table. The labels are sorted by Name from A to Z. 2. Click again on the Name column in the table. The labels are sorted by Name from Z to A. To Sort Labels by Tab 1. From the labels tab of the Personnel Views editor, click on the Location column in the table. The labels are sorted alphabetically by the View tab on which they occur. 2. Click again on the Name column in the table. The labels are sorted in reversed Alphabetic order by the View tab on which they occur. Editing Labels Using the Labels Tab You can edit the labels for fields on a view tab on the layout Designer, but you can also use the Labels tab to edit field labels if you prefer. The Labels tab makes it easy to look at all of the Field labels that make up your view, and it can help you avoid unintentionally naming fields on different tabs with the same label - because you can sort the labels alphabetically and compare labels on different tabs (see Sorting labels on Page 206). To Edit Labels Using the Labels Tab 1. From the Labels tab of the Personnel Views editor, in the Label column, click in the Label you wish to edit. 2. Type in the value that you want for the label. 3. Click elsewhere to set the value. The Views Editor will validate the label you typed and display an error message if the label value is invalid. Personnel Views Labels Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Views Labels tab are shown in Table 34 on Page 206. Table 34: PersonnelViews Labels Tab Definitions Field/Button Description Language This drop-down list shows the languages for which C•CURE 9000 language resourceshave been installed on your system. See Selecting a Language on Page 191. Restore Labels Restores all customized labels in this Personnel View to their default values. Location Identifies the tab in the Personnel View that the field or button resides on. 206 Chapter10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227019 Personnel Views Labels Tab PersonnelViews Labels Tab Definitions (continued) Field/Button Description Name The internal name of the field or button. Default Label The text that is displayed by default in a Personnel View to represent a database field or button. This text is read-onty and can be modified by a translation tool such as the MuttiLingual User Interface editor that can modify C•C9000 language resources. Label The customized text that is displayed in a Personnel View to represent a database field or button. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 207 EFTA01227020 Personnel Views Options Tab Personnel Views Options Tab The Personnel Views Options Tab (shown in Figure 57 on Page 208) lets specify how the View you are editing can be used by Operators: • Use for personnel creation • Use for personnel editing • Use for both creating and editing. NOTE If you create a Personnel View that you do not want certain Operators to be able to access, you can change their Operator Privileges to include an Exception that gives them no access to that Personnel View. See the chapter on Privileges in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide. Figure 57: PersonnelViewsOptions Tab Layout Designer labels Optica Use for personnel creation 7,0 Use for personnel editing These settings allow you to specify different Views for adding new Personnel records and for editing existing Personnel records, and control how Operators can use these Views. • If you select Elise for personnel creation only, this View is only used when an Operator clicks New from the Personnel pane, or Save and New from within the Personnel Editor. • If you select ZUse for personnel editing only, this View is only used when an Operator selects an existing Personnel record to edit, and the Save and View button is unavailable (because you cannot use this View to create a new Personnel record). • If you select both options, this View can be used for both adding new Personnel and editing existing Personnel. • If you select neither option, or you set the Enabled field to O, this View is not enabled, and the View cannot be used by any Operator. (If there are no other Personnel Views enabled, the Operators will use the default Personnel View for both creation and editing) Example: You create a Personnel View called "NewPersonnel" that contains the basic fields that you want an Operator to be able to edit when the record is created. However, for subsequent editing of the Personnel record, you intend to use a different Personnel View called "EditPersonnel", with additional, optional fields that do not appear on the 'creation' Personnel View. For the "New_Personnel" View, you would select Use for personnel creation and clear Use for personnel editing. For the "Edit Personnel" View, you would select Use for personnel editing and clear Use for personnel creation. Personnel Views Options Tab Definitions The fields and buttons on the Personnel Views Options tab are shown in Table 35 on Page 209. 208 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227021 Personnel Views Options Tab Table 35: PersonnelViewsOptionsTab Definitions Field/Button Description Use for personnel creation Select th is check box to enable the Personnel View to be used when creating a new Personnel record. Use for personnel editing Select this check box to enable the Personnel View to be used when editing an existing Personnel record. C•CURE 9000 Personnel ConfigutatIon Guide Chapter 10 209 EFTA01227022 Personnel Views Proper ties Panel Personnel Views Properties Panel The Personnel Views Properties panel has two tabs: • Personnel Views Properties Tab on Page 214 - allows you to specify the settings for a field, label, tab, or group box on the Layout Designer tab. • Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab on Page 219 - allows you to add fields, labels, tab controls, tab pages, or group boxes to the Layout Designer. Figure 58 on Page 210 shows the panel hidden and displayed. Figure 58: PersonnelViews PropertiesTab Ape 4irierisomt /OM PROM Yrl 20V0vai 4 ENNIO Paws, Nes u oedema osa OtOC•aS to n0..9. 014...:0•404 Una) • gee tad. QP aw ung Pea Mos I Ours! Orca d Cuss Omar MSS r —I— P ."r 7. Puna. Dem Hover cursor on / P b to disp ay hidden Properties Of Click Fieldsend icon • if MneresTs':atel (isbCOMill 7;1 0 lop ed loll Caning Cement ley 0 %I 59) Nae See Personnel Views Properties Tab Definitions on Page 214 for definitions of the fields and buttons on the Personnel Views Properties tab. See Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab Definitions on Page 220 for definitions of the fields and buttons on the Personnel Views Fields and Controls tab. 210 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227023 Personnel Views Properties Panel The panel is anchored to the frame of the Personnel Views Editor window, and the tabs of the panel can be displayed or hidden individually. You can pin the panel open, auto-hide the panel when not in use, or use it as an independent floating window. • Pinning the Properties Panel on Page 211. • Auto-Hiding the Properties Panel on Page 211. • Floating the Properties Pane on Page 212 Pinning the Properties Panel By default, the Properties Panel is anchored to the frame of the Personnel Views Editor window. If you hover over one of the tab anchors (indicated in Figure 58 on Page 210, that tab opens. When you move the cursor away, the tab closes again (this is called auto-hide). You can cause the panel to be always displayed by pinning open the panel (see Figure 59 on Page 211). To Pin Open the Properties Panel 1. Hover over the Properties tab or the Fields and Controls tab anchor (circled in Figure 58 on Page 210). The Properties panel is displayed. 2. Click M on the title bar of the Properties panel. The button changes to O and the panel stays open (see Figure 59 on Page 211). You can alternate between the Properties tab and the Fields and Controls tab by clicking on either tab's anchor (circled in Figure 59 on Page 211). Figure 59: Properties Panel Pinned Open j.111..wan. Obecan. - ••••••••••• • lamas !Pr lloW twww . vw . • Isiah. Obsww. • 0.2m--.14 r!. or... I long tn• CO•41.1 I IV = les S Tab Auto-Hiding the Properties Panel If you have pinned open the Properties Panel, you can unpin it and revert to the default auto-hide behavior. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukie Chapter 10 211 EFTA01227024 Personnel Views Properties Panel To Auto•Hide the Properties Panel 1. Click 0 on the title bar of the Properties panel. The button changes to and the panel closes (see Figure 60 on Page 212). 2. You can now hover over the tab anchors (circled in Figure 60 on Page 212) to alternate opening and closing the Properties tab and the Fields and Controls tab. Figure 60: Properties Panel Unpinned El Salami. Enabled Tut TabloCoat 0 CI Layout Anchor Top, Ikea BackColor 0 CANS ForaColor El Lccatkon 0.3 01 Sze %1.597 El Span Name persarneatCorcrol Pawl autollsofortr01 TyveNarne Staten. Wndon Frans Otaptelis Adds and Cone.* I Double-click title bar to "float" pane Floating the Properties Pane You can cause the Properties Panel to open as a floating window that you can re-position anywhere on your desktop (see Figure 61 on Page 213). To Float the Properties Panel 1. Hover over the Properties tab or the Fields and Controls tab anchor (indicated in Figure 58 on Page 210). The Properties panel is displayed. 2. Double-click on the title bar of the Properties Panel to float the window. 3. To return the Properties Panel to its anchored position, double-click the title bar again. Use the same procedure to float the Fields and Controls panel. 212 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle EFTA01227025 Personnel Views Properties Panel Figure 61: Flaoting Properties Panel Being Moved (translucent rectangle) Around the Desktop •••••••••14.• ••••••no me.• Mo Is - t city 10.00•00. 0•600 Les* 0000.00 1±14:0, 004••• . .4000 Pmeelfs wamssi 14•••••• Ora ^ El: Inas. tedooltre .t "II VII C•CURE 9000 Personnel ConfiguratIon Guide Chapter 10 213 EFTA01227026 Personnel Views Properties Tab Personnel Views Properties Tab The Personnel Views Properties tab (shown in Figure 58 on Page 210) of the Personnel Views Properties Panel displays a form that lets you change the properties of a field or label on the Personnel View. Example: If you want to change the background color of a GroupBox that you added to a tab, you can select the GroupBox, display the Properties tab, and click in the BackColor property to select a background color for the GroupBox. Figure 62: Properties Form on Properties Panel [personnelTabControl TabControl ) )1 B Behavior Enabled Tabindex True 0 El Layout Anchor BackColor ForeCdor El Location Size B System Name Parent TypeName Top. Bottom. Lett. Ruh! Control Control Text 0. 3 951. 597 personnegabContrd autoUserControll Systen.Wridows.Pctms.Tar Enabled Properties lay Fields and Controls See Personnel Views Properties Tab Definitions on Page 214 for definitions of the properties on the Personnel View Properties Tab. Personnel Views Properties Tab Definitions The fields and buttons available on the Personnel Views Properties tab are shown in Table 36 on Page 215. The properties that appear in this tab depend on the type of field/button you are editing. Table 37 on Page 215 provides definitions of the properties and identifies the types of fields with which each property. 214 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227027 Personnel Views Properties Tab Table 36: PersonnelViews Properties Tab Fieldsand Buttons Field/Button Description Selected Field Select the field whose properties you wish to edit from this drop-down list. Categorized This button arranges the properties in several categories (Behavior, Layout, System, and Translation). rail!I i Alphabetical A i This button arranges the properties in a 1pha betica lords r. Property Pages 1 Not available. Fields and Controls Property Definitions Table 37 on Page 215 describes the properties that are included on all fields and controls. Table 37: Properties Tab- F ields and Controls Definitions Field/Button Type Description Behavior ReadOnly TextBox This property indicates whether the contents of a TextBox can be edited by an Operator. If set to True, the contents cannot be edited. If set to False, the contents can be edited. Enabled Tab Button CheckBox DateTimePicker TableLayout Panel Set this property to True to allow an Operator to use this object. Set this property to False to make this object unavailable for Operator use. Example: A CheckBox with enabled set to False is unavailable for selection when an Operator is editing a Personnel record. Example: If you set Enabled to False for the User-defined Field Panel, the Panel and its contents are disabled when an Operator edits a Personnel record. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 215 EFTA01227028 Personnel Views Properties Tab Properties Tab - F ields and Controls Definitions (continued) Field/Button Type Description 1 :“;17I iCX Tab Label TextBox DateTimePicker CheckBox Selection Button Data Grid Tool Strip TableLayout Panel This property allows you to set the tab order (where the cursor moves to when an Operator clicks the Tab key) for individual objects on the Personnel View. The Tabindex values can range from 0 to 2147483647. NOTE: You can use the Reset Tabbing Order button on the Personnel View toolbar to set the overall tabbing order for the Personnel Views editor. • When an Operator presses Tab. the cursor moves to the field or button whose Tabindex is higher in the numerical tab order. • When an Operator presses SHIF T +Tab key, the cursor moves to the field or button whose Tabindex is lower in the numerical tab order. Example: If you change the Tabindex for MiddieName from 3 to 6. the tab order of the General Tab ischanged so that Middle Name is next in the tab order after Last Name. • Labels have a Tabindex. but Tab does not move the cursor to a Label. The Label Tabindex is used when you define Hot Keys. If you wish to create Hot Keys to tab to a field, the Label and the associated field must be in order, with no other fields with a Tabindex value in between. For example, if the Label's Tabindex is 3 and the field's Text Box has a tabindexof 6, if another label or field has a tabindexof 4 or 5. the Hot key won't work correctly. See Creating Hot Keys on a Personnel View Tab on Page 218 for more information. Layout Anchor All This field you Example: Thisgraphic Mos However, and property lets you or control is affected want to enable. shows specify how you want the field to be anchored on the View. It determines how the when a user stretches the View. Click the drop-down and click on the anchors Top and Left selected. ed Top. Left. and do not change their sizes when the main control is resized. are anchored Top. Left. Bottom. Right. and these controls change their height when the main control is resized. fields are ancho grid controls vidth accordingly AutoSize Label CheckBox This property sets the size of the label to the minimum height and width if True. If this property is set to False, you can resize the labelmanually (only on Label and CheckBox). BackColor Label TextBox DateTimePicker CheckBox Group Box Tab Control Button Data Grid Panel This property lets you specify the background color of the field or button from a drop-down list that shows sample colors. Typically labels and buttons are set to Transparent, while fields are set to a system color such as Window or Control. But you can use this property to assign a different color to the text to provide emphasis. Example: If you change the BackColor of the Design button on the Customer tab to Red, the face of the button appears in Red. The BackColor drop-down list has tabs for System, Web, and Custom (RGB) colors. If you right-click on a blank color on the Custom tab, a Windows color picker is displayed that allows you to define a custom color. 216 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227029 Personnel Views Properties Tab Properties Tab - Fields and Controls Definitions (continued) Field/Button Type Description ForeCoar Label TextBox DateTimePicker CheckBox Group Box Tab Control Button Data Grid Panel This property lets you specify the text or color of the field or button from a drop-down list that shows sample colors. Typically labels and buttons are set to ControlText (black), while fields are set to a system color such as WindowText. But you can use this property to assign a different color to the text to provide emphasis. Example: If you change the ForeColor of the Design button on the Customer tab to Red, the text on the button appears in Red. The ForeColor drop-down list has tabs for System, Web, and Custom (RGB) colors. If you right-click on a blank color on the Custom tab, a Windows color picker is displayed that allows you to define a custom color. Location CheckBox DateTimePicker TextBox TableLayout Panel This property specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinates for the position of thetop left corner of the object on the tab or box. You can enter the value as two comma-separated values, or you can enter the values individually in the X and Y properties after clicking Q. You can also move the control with the mouse to change these values. Size All Two comma-separated integers that specify the width and height, respectively, of a field or label. You can enter the value as two comma-separated values, or you can enter the values individually in the Width and Height properties after clicking W. You can also change the size of the control with the mouse to change these values. Example: 200,145 represents a field that is 200 pixels wide by 145 pixels high. For many fields, the height is a fixed number. T exlAbg n Label Integer Date TextBox You can select whether text or numbers are Left-aligned, Right-aligned, or Center-aligned. System Name All This read-only field displays the name of the field or label in the system. This name also appear in the Name column on the Labels tab, and on the context (right-click) menu. Parent All This read-only field displays the name of the parent object for a field or label. Often this represents the Group Box which contains the field/control. TypeName All This read-only field displays the type of the field or label. Translation DefauttLabel Label GroupBox CheckBox Button Tab Page This read-only property shows the system label that displays in a dynamic view. This property isnot available for new custom labels that you create. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 217 EFTA01227030 PersonnelViews Properties Tab Properties Tab Fields and Controls Definitions (continued) Field/Button Type Description LaL,u Label GroupBox CheckBox Button Tab Page This property provides a user-editable field label toren object in a Personnel View. You can change the Label text toren object such as a Button or GroupBox. For example, You could change the label for the Print Badge button to"Click to print badge". UseDefaultLabel Label CheckBox GroupBox Button The value is True if the DefauttLabel and Label properties are equal. This property is not avalable for new labels that you create. If you set this flag to True, the Label property is changed to match the DefaultLabel property. If you change the Label property so that it no longer matches the DefaultLabel, this flag is set to False. Creating Hot Keys on a Personnel View Tab You can create Hot Keys for fields on a Personnel View. Hot Keys are navigation shortcuts that an Operator can use to move the cursor to specific fields. When you click Mt + Hot Key, the cursor moves to the field associated with that Hot Key. NOTE Some of the Hot Keys that were defined for Personnel fields in previous versions have changed because of Personnel view changes. Hot Keys are defined in the properties of a Label. The Hot Key is defined by placing an ampersand ("&") in the Label in front of the Hot Key letter or symbol. The Hot Key is displayed as an underscored letter in the Label. NOTE If more than one label is assigned the same Hot Key, clicking Mt + Hot Key more than once tabs to the additional fields. However, if you assign a field in a Personnel View tab the same hotkey that is also assigned to a main window toolbar command (AIH-S for Save and Close, AIH-w for Save and New, AIH-t for Current View), the main window toolbar hotkey assignment is ignored unless the cursor is in the toolbar. Example: The Middle Name label is displayed as "Middle Name" indicating a Hot Key of "M"; when you click A1H-m, the cursor moves to the Middle Name field. To Define a Hot Key for a Personnel View Field 1. From the layout Designer, select the label for a field. 2. Right-click and select Properties. 3. In the Label property, type an "&" in front of the letter or number that you want to act as a Hot Key. Example: If you want to change the Hot Key for Last Name to "N", change the label from &Last Name to Last &Name. 4. Save the change by clicking Save and Close, or continue editing. 218 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227031 Personnel VIews 'olds and Controls Tab Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab The Personnel Views Fields and Controls tab (shown in Figure 63 on Page 219) of the Personnel Views Properties panel displays a tree structure that organizes the tools and fields that can be added to a Personnel View. When you remove a field from a Personnel View, that field is included on the Fields and Controls tab so that it can be added to any tab in the Personnel View you are editing. Example: If you want to move the Text2 field from the Customer tab to the General tab, delete the Text2 field from the Customer tab, then navigate to the General tab, display the Fields and Controls tab, and look in the tree under Hidden Fields, Customer tab to locate the Text2 TextBox, then drag the Text2 TextBox onto the General tab. Also, if User-defined fields are added to a C•CURE 9000 system, those fields appear in the Fields and Control tab Hidden Fields User-defined fields folder, available to be added to any tab in the Personnel View. See Adding User￾defined Fields to a Personnel View on Page 220 for more information. See Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab Definitions on Page 220 for definitions of all fields and buttons on the Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab. Figure 63: Fieldsand Controls Tab &nada.. easemc.ef Penterel_Ve. 1 ammo= PJE•sire PSI. OAS toyer (meth eras sows) • - grow took Q. terns. nowt Ara T.ttool coo. CraisalinoessialpsI Gas 1 Coen fareee I won &ono Paves Dan nno Onnisfo Inke cot , Ana BS ot Iv Saone Nene Sara bon Pato. SOSO Prfts Yealn End frown o. Sans Pone n End Ens, Pow tineontleir Gsddrww Soe Guard emdaProy*Srvel Cot) ErnAml Dee tan.. Pone NH* ind (am:, 1.O. ',EC** Te. A tar roan Fan then:Pared r..a har.sotrinorco Vordernni het* E tAedenol re* b.* .0 t-J °corns Rawer DJ (man Op.Pootoon a. None. IttSioDec,...ertsl * Ciecata *bit** Or CIdo Fo avaCmint C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 219 EFTA01227032 Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab The Properties Views Properties panel Fields and Controls tab can be hidden or displayed in several ways (see Figure 58 on Page 210). Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab Definitions The following fields and buttons shown in Table 38 on Page 220 are available on the Fields and Controls tab. Table 38: Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab Definitions FielcUButton Description Tools Folder This folder oontainswidgets for adding GroupBox, TabControl, TabPage, and Labelobjects to a Personnel View. You can select one of these widgets and drag it to a Personnel VIEW. These widgets are &waysavailable, allowing you to create as many custom widgetsof the specified type as you need. GroupBox The Grou pBox widget can be added to a Personnel View or TabPage. The GroupBox is used to group together fields to help a user perceive the relationship between the fields. TabControl A TabControl can be added to a Personnel View or a TabPage. The default TabControl has two TabPages, but additional TabPagescan be added to the TabControl. After adding a TabControl, you can add fields and other objects to its TabPages. TabPage A TabPage can be added to a TabControl. Label A Label can be added to any tab in the Personnel View. Click the tab on which you want to place the label, then drag the label to the tab. You can position the La be I on the tab by d ragg ing it around or by setting its Location on the Properties tab. Hidden Fields Folder Fields All fields that are not present on the Personnel VIEWS tabs are available to be dragged onto a tab. Field are organized based on their original position on a tab in the default Personnel View. User-defined fields are available in a separate folder. You can drag a field from the Hidden Fields folder to any tab in the Personnel View. 1. Click the tab on which you want to place the field, then drag to field to the tab. 2. Position the field on the tab by dragging it around or by setting its Location on the Properties tab. Dragging a field onto the View creates both a label (if one exists) and an edit control for editing the field on the View. The label is located to the left of the drop point and the edit control is created to the right of the drop point. Example: The Generate Random Card Number button son the default Credentials tab. If you remove this button from the Credentials tab, it appears under Hidden Flelds>Credentlals. This button has no label, so it appears as g in Hidden Fields, and when you place it on a view. it appears as , b,. Adding User-defined Fields to a Personnel View When you create new User-defined fields: ■ if the Personnel View is one of the Default Views included with the system, the User-defined fields are not shown. (You can create a copy of a default view and add User-defined Fields to the copy.) ■ if the Personnel View is created after the User-defined fields were created, the User-defined fields appear on the User-defined Fields tab in the Personnel View, if the Operator creating the View has at least read access to the User-defined fields. 220 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227033 PersonnelViews F 'bids and Controls Tab ■ If the Personnel View is created before the User-defined fields were created, the User-defined fields do not appear in the Personnel View, and would need to be added manually. The User-defined Fields are available on the Fields and Controls tab in the Hidden Helds>User-defined Fields folder. See the User-defined Fields chapter in the C•CURE 9000 Software Configuration Guide for more information about User-defined fields. To Add User-defined Fields to a Personnel View 1. Click the Personnel Views tab in the Personnel Views editor on which you want to add a User-defined field. 2. Display the Properties Panel (see Personnel Views Properties Panel on Page 210). 3. Click on the Fields and Controls tab. 4. Click WHidden Fields, then OUser-defined Fields to open the folder contain the User-defined fields. 5. Select the field that you want to add to the view and drag it to a location on the Personnel View tab. The field and its label are positioned on the Personnel View. 6. You can use Save and Close to save the view, or continue editing. C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Chapter 10 221 EFTA01227034 Personnel Views Fields and Controls Tab 222 Chapter 10 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227035 Index A Association Category 58,137 Access Card, removing 62 Audit Log Accessing finding in 24 Clearance Editor 110 Auto Generate PIN 58,137 Personnel Editor 38 B Personnel Views Editor 185 Badge Layout 161 Activate Antipassback Event option for Personnel 47 Definitions 165 Activate Temporary Credential 41,127 Editor 162 Adding on Personnel Pane 16 Access Card 61 Tasks 162 Card Access 59 Badge Setup Clearance 65 enrolling Smart Card 80 Document programming Smart Card 80 Private 94 Badging tab Shared 93 dDefinitions 77 Documents 93 tasks 78 Door/Door Group to Clearance 112 Batch Print Badges 40,126 Elevator/Elevator Group to Clearance 113 Bring to front in Badge Layout 195 Field to Tab in Layout Designer 194 C Image to Personnel Record 72 Can Perform Guard Tour option for Personnel 48 Personnel to Group, from context menu 24 Card Format Editor, how to access 17 Personnel Trigger 97 Card Status PIN-Only Access Credential 62 disabled 60 PIN Only Access 59 Disabled 57,136 Signature to Personnel Record 75 Expired 57,136 tab to Personnel Views 199 lost 60 Advanced Search, for Personnel 30 Lost 57,136 Agency Code 57,136 stolen 60 Aligning Fields Stolen 57,136 Personnel Views 197 Changing Alternate Shunt (ADA) option for Personnel 47 field properties for Personnel Views 198 Antipasback Reset Card 41 Partition of Personnel, from context menu 24 Antipassback Exempt option for Personnel 47 Choosing Operator Name 50 Area Lockout Grace 41 CHUID 58,137 Assign Temporary Credential 41 definitions 177 Assigning Format 167 Clearances 41 Editor 171 Personnel Views to Operators 186 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle Index 223 EFTA01227036 Index Editor Buttons 178 Editor definitions 177 Fields 179 modifying 173 on Personnel Pane 16 tasks 171 validation 174 CHUID Overview 168 Clearance accessing Editor 110 adding Doorr/Door Group to 112 adding Elevator/Elevator Group to 113 configuring 111 creating 111 Doors tab 115 Editor 110 Elevators tab 116 Filter Level 65-66 General tab 114 Goups tab 118 on Personnel Pane 16 removing Door/Door Group and Elev￾ator/Elevator Group to 114 tab tasks 65 tasks 110 Columns, adding to Dynamic View 21 Complete Previous Doors button 82 Configuring Clearance 111 Personnel Advanced Search (Query) 33 Context menu Exporting Personnel Portraits 42 Exporting to XML/CSV 24 Context menu for objects using 23 Conventions used in this manual 12 Create Copy button, Personnel Views 185 Create from Template, Personnel Record 42 Creating Badge Layout 163 Clearance 111 Copies of Personnel Views 185 Object 18 from Template 19 Object Template 18 Credential 121 Dynamic View 132 Batch Print Badges 126 Context Menu 125 Editor tabs 132 on Personnel Pane 16 Credentials tab definitions 55 Issue 58,136 Series 57,136 tasks 59 Credentials, disabling for inactivity configuring 44 credential status 56-57, 59,136 exempting personnel from 45 in Enterprise environment 27 overview 26 setting for personnel types 102 Credentials, searching for 36 Ctrl+z, restoring deleted Objects 192 Current View drop-down list 39 Personnel 49 Custom Clearance Dynamic View 152 Context Menu 152 on Personnel Pane 16 tasks 152 removing expired from person 153 Customer Extended tab 69 definitions 69 Customer Field editor 183 Customer Support Center 13 Customer tab definitions 68 224 Index C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227037 Index D Default Personnel Views 39 Default Personnel Edit View 182 Personnel View with Header 182-183 Defining, Personnel Advanced Search (Query) Deleting Group Box from Personnel Views 201 Personnel Record 25 Personnel View 25 Personnel, from context menu 23 Security Object 25 Disabled Card Status 57, 60,136 Disabled option for Personnel 47 Documents 93 adding to a Personnel Record 91 tab Personnel 92 Documents tab 91 Dynamic View, adding columns to 21 E Editing Labels, on Labels tab 206 Object 20 Personnel, from context menu 23 Email Reminder 126 Emergency Support Hours 13 Enrolling Fingerprint 78 Smart Card 80 Escort Option for Personnel 48 setting for Personnel 52 Expired Card Status 57,136 Exporting Object 24 selected Portrait 40 selection, from context menu 24 Exporting Personnel Portraits using Context menu 42 F Fields aligning in Personnel Views 197 changing labels in Personnel Views 198 33 changing properties 198 labels 198 labels in Personnel Views 183 Fields and Controls tab 194 Definitions 220 Personnel Views 219 Filtering, list of Objects 22 Finding in Audit Log, from context menu 24 Journal, from context menu 24 Fingerprint, enrolling 78 G General Tab for Personnel, tasks 46 Grace Carpool Group 41 Grace Personnel 40 Group Box adding to Personnel Views 201 moving a field 196 GroupBox Control 201 Groups tab, Clearance 118 Guard Tour on Personnel Pane 16 Guard TourScheduling on Personnel Pane 16 H Hidden Fields, layout Designer 196 HMAC, on Personnel Credentials tab 58,136 Images 155 adding to Personnel Record 72 Dynamic View, Personnel Image types 156 Editor 156 Definitions 159 tasks 156 importing 156 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Index 225 EFTA01227038 Index on Personnel Pane 17 tab on Personnel Editor Definitions 71 tasks 72 Importing Image 156 Inactivity Exempt option for Personnel 47 Intrusion Zone Administrator option for Personnel 47 J Journal, finding in 24 K Keypad Command Administrator option for Per￾sonnel 47 L Labels tab, Personnel Views definitions 206 tasks 204 Language Pack, installing 192 Layout Designer Bring to Front 195 docked window 190 floating window 190 launching Badge Designer 162 Personnel Views 190 send to back 195 tasks 189 Limited Previous Doors button 82 Lost Card Status 57, 60,136 M Mark Lost 126 Mark Stolen 126 Moving Field or Label, Layout Designer 194 Field to Another Tab, Layout Designer 195 Multilingual User Interface Editor 192 N Normal Support Hours 13 Noticed option for Personnel 47 O Object Template, creating 18 Operators assigning Personnel Views 186 choosing name 50 removing access to Personnel View 187 Options for Personnel Activate Antipassback Event 47 Alternate Shunt (ADA) 47 Antipassback Exempt 47 Can Perform Guard Tour 48 disabled 47 Escort 48 Inactivity Exempt 47 Intrusion Zone Administrator 47 Keypad Command Administrator 47 noticed 47 Organizational Category 58,137 Organizational Identifier 58,137 Partition, changing for Personnel 24 Performing Personnel Quick Search 30,129 Personnel adding image 72 Advanced Search for, defining 33 Badging tab 77 definitions 77 Clearances tab 64 definitions 64 Creating an Object 18 Credentials tab 54 definitions 55 tasks 59 Credentials, disabling for inactivity in Enterprise environment 27 overview 26 Current View 49 Custom Clearance tab 84 Custom Clearances in Enterprise environment 84 226 Index C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227039 Index definitions 85 tasks 87 Customer Extended tab 69 definitions 69 Customer tab 67 definitions 68 deleting 23 Documents tab 93 definitions 92 Dynamic View Context Menu 39 Editor 37 tabs 37 tasks 37 General tab 46 definitions 46 Images tab 71 definitions 71 Introduction 15 on Personnel Pane 17 Options Activate Antipassback Event 47 Alternate Shunt (ADA) 47 Antipasspack Exempt 47 Can Perform Guard Tour 48 disabled 47 Escort 48 Inactivity Exempt 47 Keypad Command Administrator 47 noticed 47 Pane overview 16 Personnel Triggers tab 96 definitions 96 tasks 97 Previous Doors tab 81 definitions 81 Quick Search for 30,129 removing expired Custom Clearance from 153 Save options Save 49 Save and Close 49 Save and New 49 tasks, basic 18 Personnel Identifier, Credentials tab 58,137 Personnel Type 99 Context Menu 103 definitions 102 on Personnel Pane 17 overview 100 Personnel Views adding GroupBox 201 tab 199 user-defined fields 220 aligning fields 197 changing field label 198 field properties 198 Create Copy button 185 Default Personnel Edit View 182 default views 39,182 deleting Group Box 201 Dynamic View List Context Menu 186 Editor 182 tabs 183 tasks 184 Fields and Controls tab 219 definitions 220 Labels tab 204 definitions 206 Layout Designer tasks 189 Layout Designer tab 189 definitions 202 moving a field 196 on Personnel Pane 17 Options tab 208 definitions 208 overview 182 Personnel View with Header 183 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide Index 227 EFTA01227040 Index Properties panel 210 field from Personnel Views 197 Fields and Controls tab 210 Image from Personnel Record 75 properties tab 210 Personnel Trigger 98 Properties tab 214 Signature from Personnel Record 75 definitions 214 tab from Personnel Views 200 removing Resizing field on Personnel Views 196 field from 197 Restoring tab from 200 Default Labels 205 Resizing a Field on 196 deleted Objects, Personnel Views 192 selecting 39 labels on Personnel Views 192 setting Tab order for 200 Layout on Personnel Views 193 User-defined Fields tab 83 Return Temporary Credential 41,127 PIN, auto generate 58,137 Previewing Badge 79 Save options for Personnel editor Previous Doors Save 49 buttons 82 Save and Close 49 list 81 Save and New 49 tab 81 Search functions for Personnel definitions 81 Advanced search 30 tasks 82 for Credentials 36 Printing Instant Query 30 Badge 80 Quick Search 30 list of Objects 22 Selecting Programming Smart Card 80 Badge Portrait 78 Properties tab Language for Labels in Personnel Views 205 Personnel Views 214 Language for Personnel Views 191 definitions 214 Objects in Layout Designer 193 Q Personnel Views 39 Quick Search, for Personnel 30 language 191 R Send to back in Badge Layout 195 Remove Clearances 41 Setting remove Person from Area 41 Card Formats for Mag Stripe Encoding 164 Removing Clearance Filter Level 66 Access Card 62 General PIN 53 access to Personnel Views from Operators 187 language for Personnel Views 191 Clearance 66 Options for Personnel 51 Credential 59 Personnel Type 49 Door/Door Group and Elevator/Elevator Group Property, from context menu 24 from Clearance 114 Tab order for Personnel Views 200 expired Custom Clearance from person 153 Show Association 42 228 Index C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227041 Index Sorting Labels 206 list of Objects 22 Stolen Card Status 57, 60,136 System Code 57,136 T Telephone Technical Support 13 Template, creating object from 19 Triggers tab tasks 97 U User-defined fields in Personnel Views 182 User-defined fields tab created for Personnel Views 83 Using context menu for objects 23 V Validate CHUID Uniqueness button 59,137 Validating CHUID Format 174 CHUID uniqueness 59, 63,137 Viewing Complete Previous Doors List 82 Limited Previous Doors List 82 list of CHUID Formats 177 list of Personnel Views 186 Visit 17 Visitor Management 17 C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Gukle Index 229 EFTA01227042 Index 230 Index C•CURE 9000 Personnel Configuration Guide EFTA01227043